JP2016083467A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of inhibiting a decrease in interest in a game by executing a novel performance and hence preventing mannerism.SOLUTION: Movement to a standby position from a storage position is performed by crossing a front of a liquid crystal display device 1900 while an upper arm decorative body 3304 and a front arm decorative body 3352 are being hidden at a backside of a rear upper front decorative body 3406, thus enabling a player to focus on the rear upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the front arm decorative body 3352. Display of the crystal display device 1900 is blacked out for a predetermined period and a lamp/LED arranged near the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the front arm decorative body 3352, and the rear upper front decorative body 3406 are moved during that time, thus preventing a player from easily noticing that the upper arm decorative body 3304, the front arm decorative body 3352, and the rear upper front decorative body 3406 are moving to the storage position, and hence preventing the player from feeling incongruity.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 108

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  As a gaming machine, a game device as a game medium is driven into a game area formed on the front surface of the game board, and a display device (for example, a game device based on the fact that this game ball is won at a start port provided in the game area) In some cases, a liquid crystal display device) performs a variable display of symbols and the like, and controls the jackpot gaming state to give a predetermined profit to the player when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

  In such a gaming machine, a plurality of proposals have been made to improve the game entertainment by executing a notice effect and a reach effect for notifying that there is a possibility of being a big hit even during the display of fluctuations that are out of place ( For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-136228 A

  In the above gaming machine, even when the display of the fluctuation is out of the game, the notice effect may be executed to give a notice that there is a possibility that the game will be a big hit. While it is possible to improve the expectation for the big hit gaming state, it is possible to improve the expectation for the big hit gaming state by inducing a rutiness by executing similar notice effects and reach effects on a plurality of gaming machines. It was difficult.

  In view of the above situation, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a rutiness by executing a novel effect and suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.
In order to achieve the above object, according to the first aspect of the present invention, after the start condition is satisfied (start winning prize; game balls are awarded to the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102), the start condition is satisfied (for example, The value of the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, and YES in step S110 of the first special symbol normal process, and the second special symbol process flag in the second special symbol process process. Multiple values based on the value indicating that the same processing as the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol normal processing) should be performed and YES corresponding to step S110 of the first special symbol normal processing) A variable display device (liquid crystal display device 1900) that variably displays the symbol information and displays and displays the display result;
A winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning condition (for example, YES in step S115 of the big hit determination process) established when the start condition is satisfied (a portion for executing the big hit determination process of the main control MPU 4100a); ,
Display control means for controlling the display of the variable display device based on the determination result of the corresponding drop determination means (part for performing the effect control process of the peripheral control MPU 4140a; step S602),
When the winning determination means determines that the winning condition is satisfied, the display control means derives and displays a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the variable display device, and then gives a profit (prize ball) to the player. In the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) that controls to the profit granting state (big hit gaming state)
Movable members (back upper front decorative body 3406, upper arm decorative body 3304, and forearm decorative body 3352) movable in a predetermined movable manner;
Although the movable member is displayed in front of the variable display device that is visible to the player from the storage position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize after the start of the variable display, a predetermined movable mode (forearm decoration) A mode in which the entire body 3352 is in an appearance position visible from the player side; from the state where the forearm decoration body 3352 overlaps with the upper arm decoration body 3304, the tip side is rotated so as to move away from the upper arm decoration body 3304, and the back upper front decoration body The upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the rear side of the 3406 (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the forearm decorative body is further moved to the left in front view. In a mode in which the entire position 3352 is in the appearance position visible from the player side), it is spared without passing through the front of the variable display device and moving to a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A moving means (part for moving back the upper front decorative body 3406 near control MPU4140a, brachial decorative body 3304, and a forearm ornamental body 3352 to the standby position from the retracted position),
Specific movable means for moving the movable member moved to the standby position by the preliminary movable means to an appearance position ahead of the variable display device and moving in the specific movable mode (standby position of the peripheral control MPU 4140a (FIG. 174 ( c)) Only the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 that are waiting are rotated clockwise in front view so that the proximal end side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decoration body 3406 in the left direction and the forearm. From the state in which the decorative body 3352 overlaps with the upper arm decorative body 3304, the front end side is turned away from the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 are moved from the rear side of the front upper decorative body 3406. As a result, the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is idled by moving the arm unit 3250 leftward in a front view (see FIG. 175 (d)). And partial) to the state of the occurrence position which is visible from Sha side,
The movable member that has been moved to the standby position by the preliminary movable means and the movable member that has been moved to the appearance position by the specific movable means and moved in the specific movable manner to the storage position for storage. Means (portions for moving the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 from the standby position to the storage position) of the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the specific mode is determined in advance even though the movable member is exposed to the front of the variable display device that is visible to the player from the storage position where the player is difficult to visually recognize. In order to pass the front of the variable display device without moving it to a standby position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the player who thought that the movable member was exposed was removed and the subsequent movable member was exposed. I can have expectations for it. Further, after the movable member is moved to the standby position, the movable member is moved to the storage position from the standby position without moving the movable member to the appearance position and moving in the specific movable manner. Since it is difficult to recognize the movement to the storage position, it is difficult to notice the movement of the movable member from the standby position to the storage position, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to execute a novel effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which removed the rear case of the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from before. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launching power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen from the back. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board in FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which makes a 2nd attacker unit easy to see. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is a perspective view of an attacker unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back lower. (A) It is a front view of an attacker unit, (b) is a BB sectional view in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the projection area | region by the projector unit of an attacker unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front left movable production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front left movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front left movable production | generation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a front left movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of a center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen afterwards. It is a front view which expands and shows the 2nd attacker unit in a center accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a 2nd attacker unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right movable production | presentation unit in a center accessory and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front right movable production | presentation unit in a center accessory, and was seen afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the front right movable production | presentation unit in a center accessory. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a front view of the back middle movable production | presentation unit in a back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back middle movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back middle movable production unit from the back. It is the exploded oblique view which decomposed | disassembled the back middle movable production | generation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back middle movable production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed later. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in the back inside movable production | presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back inside drive mechanism in the back inside movable production unit from the back. It is the exploded oblique view which decomposed | disassembled the back middle drive mechanism for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the back middle drive mechanism as seen from the rear after disassembling each main member. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back middle movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the back rear movable movable effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable production | generation unit after back on from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back rear movable movable production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back rear movable movable production unit into the arm slide unit and the arm unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back rear movable production | generation effect unit into the arm slide unit and the arm unit, and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the arm slide unit of the back rear movable production | generation effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the arm slide unit of the back rear movable production | generation effect unit, and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of the back rear movable movable production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm unit of a back upper rear movable production | presentation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the arm unit of the back rear movable movable effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the arm unit of the back rear upper movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper arm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the forearm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the forearm unit of the arm unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion by the arm slide unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion by the arm unit in a back top movable production | presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front front movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back front front movable production unit from the back. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the front front movable production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front front movable effect unit as seen from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back front front movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the back-up front movable production | presentation unit in a back unit, and a back-up rear movable production | generation unit. 175 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between the back-up front movable effect unit and the back-up / down movable effect unit subsequent to FIG. 174; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom movable movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back movable production | generation unit into the back lower back decoration body unit, the raising / lowering unit, etc., and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back movement effect unit into the back lower back decoration body unit, the raising / lowering unit, etc., and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back decoration body unit of the back lower back movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower back decoration body unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back decorative body unit. It is a perspective view which shows schematic structure of the raising / lowering unit in a back lower back movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back movable production | presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back bottom front movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower front movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower front movable production | presentation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the back left movable production | presentation unit 3700 in a back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back left movable production | presentation unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of one movable unit in a back left movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back left movable production | presentation unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a pre-determination table used for the production pre-determination process, and (B) is a table for prefetch type details determined by the pre-determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for lottery processing for jackpots, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of jackpots. It is a symbol determination table used for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of a melody reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a melody reach. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a melody reach.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the horizontal direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame depending from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. This guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the rear after being disassembled from the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 below the lower end. A pair of side speaker covers 290 disposed and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows the wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base body 110, the upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decorative unit attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and the lower left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110, and the front side of the door frame base body 110 are attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of a wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the right side speaker 130 in front view. Is further provided with a cover member 134 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. Can be done.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base main body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring cord 196 that connects the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths of the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130, and an attachment hole 110h (FIGS. 18, 24, and 24) for attaching the side speaker cover 290. Are formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right ones are arranged so as to pass through the glass unit support stepped portions 110a into which the glass units 590 are fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. Accordingly, it is possible to take time for removing the side speaker cover 290 to allow a person who performs an illegal act to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. The removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (safety) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by deceiving theft acts on the side speakers 130 and the fraudulent acts on the game area 1100 etc. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 is partially inserted into the upper decorative unit 280 so that the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, and the cross section is formed in an I-shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, so that wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric devices are connected to the door side. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, a ball rental unit 360, and a handle as electric devices Location 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper surface and the lower end portion of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3 so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 27), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 that is bent forward to the right side (open side) portion of the upper long side edge when viewed from the front. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. Note that the right (axial support side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183 in a rear view is longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end projection 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 projecting along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, although the detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208; a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side; and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210 It is equipped with.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A substrate 214 and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially vertical center of the side inner lens 212 on the lower side and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224; an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202; and a side sub-lens 228 attached to a predetermined position on a side surface of the side upper cover 208 from the inside. Yes. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper decoration board 214 on the right side is arranged so that the LED 214c is decorated for light emission.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surface of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 202a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame The inner frame 2 is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b is formed in a straight line at the substantially same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is the upper and lower sides. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition frames 202f, and each of the divided frames is divided. Is a light emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. In addition, the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a line.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guides 206a capable of protruding is provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 so that it appears as if a jewel has been fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the tip of the light guide unit 206a can be shined as a gemstone.

  The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is provided with a mounting step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, so that the side sub lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. By inserting the side sub lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this portion can emit light in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. A peripheral lens portion 210 a and a radiating lens portion 210 b inserted into the slit 202 e of the side decorative frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodation step part 210c made. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like which will be described later. Further, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208 a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron can provide a distinctive appearance in which the peripheral lens portion 210a is sparkling.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are formed in the side lens 210 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body part 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens part 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body part 212a and projects forward from the main body part 212a. And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state in which the front surface is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body part 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body part 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) to have a brilliant appearance and make the sense of perspective unclear.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e (side lens 210 of the side lens 210) is used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). Note that the LED 214c of the upper decorative substrate 214 on the right side that decorates the side sub lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position and in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper end back side of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250 It is equipped with.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration board 256. That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame A lower end frame 242d for connecting the lower end edges of 242a, and the inner frame 2 arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 that is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. In addition, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation that extends radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 to be described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition wall frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244 and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude is provided. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

  The upper side cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is provided with a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface in a front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. A peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g contacting the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 250c made. The housing step 250c accommodates an upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later. The side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to have a distinctive appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed in the side lens 250 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. A plate-shaped light guide portion 252b disposed at the position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubled and refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction allows the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) to have a sparkling appearance and make the perspective feel unclear.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e (side lens 250 of the side lens 250) is used. The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. And the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the front speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Accordingly, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the rear side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The shape is similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are placed in front. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front surface decorative member 281 so as to be sandwiched between the decorative members 281; And a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so that the outer shape of the front view is substantially the same as that of the main body and covers the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281, and the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is downward A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with. In this example, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  The front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example has an inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a in a circular arc shape in which the central upper end is a side extending left and right and the central lower end is a vertex and the respective sides are loose in front view. And has three protrusions extending from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the apex of the lower side into the central opening 281a. The front decorative member 281 has a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281a by the streaks. A side opening 281b is formed so as to extend along the streaking as well as the shape of the blade extending.

  The central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that is trillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

  The inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a fine lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as with the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. Can emit light.

  Note that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of minute lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined downward and closed. Center portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a is positioned substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286, penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central part 285a and the side part 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side, so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape of the end portion of the upper speaker frame 266 near the upper end frame 202c, 242c is substantially the same as the end shape of the upper speaker cover 226, 266 closer to the upper end frame 202c, 242c. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like. It is arranged between.

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the dish unit 300 that is disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is made of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to that of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 of this example is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position 110, the door frame base body 100 is fixed to the door frame base body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base body 110.

  Thereby, after removing the security cover 180 in the door frame 5, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screws attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. The side speaker 130 can be removed by removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front side of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the speaker can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  Thus, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door that closes the front surface of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the body member 292 from the rear side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base body 110, the body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after the main body member 292 is removed. By removing the bracket 132 and releasing the holding of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110. The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without being removed from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even when a player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is damaged, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily removed. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speakers 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged, so that the player becomes irritated and less interested and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 ( Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is not affected even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291. Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  Moreover, since the side speaker cover 290 which covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 is positioned relatively close to the player. However, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard by the player more efficiently, and a powerful sound is provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by making the sound production enjoyable.

  Further, since the side speaker 130 is disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be connected without a sense of incongruity, and the side speaker cover 290 can prevent the appearance from deteriorating, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed on the side decoration units 200 and 240. It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc. The design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be made favorable.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5. It takes a little time to remove the glass, and it is possible to make the removal work troublesome for those who are trying to perform illegal acts, etc., and to make the removal work stand out by removing the relatively large glass unit 590 The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence power (safety) against fraudulent acts etc. can be made by deceiving theft or fraudulent acts.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward and has a large front side left side (axial support side) bulging forward, and the front end of the upper plate body 312 covers the upper outer periphery. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction A plate front decoration member 316, and a plurality of light guide portions 318a which are disposed between the plate upper decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and are fitted into the openings 316a of the plate upper decoration member 316 are provided. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a on the upper surface. Are mounted between the upper plate upper decorative panel 320 and the upper plate upper decorative panel 314 and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322. And an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  The dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and covers the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 328, a dish side middle cover 330 having openings 330 a that are disposed on both left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the dish side middle cover 330 A dish-side middle cover lens 332 fitted from the side, and a dish-side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. Note that the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is formed with a lock hole 330b at a right end portion thereof to face a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; see FIG. 171).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end, and a decoration attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later, formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the plate body 312.

  Although not described in detail, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 has upper and lower positions at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening or notch that penetrates in the direction is formed, and an opening through which a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314, and the light guide part 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 from the lower side to the plurality of openings 316a. And the upper plate upper lens 318 can be held between the upper plate upper panel 314 by being attached to the decorative attachment portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper plate upper lens 318, and an upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and an upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are disposed. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper dish upper lens 318 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. It is shaped, and by fitting this light guide portion 318a, it appears to have an appearance that a pair-shaped gemstone is fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangle shape with the outer shape in front view bulging downward and arcs on each side, and includes an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along a lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 includes an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in the front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330 c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330 c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is like that. In addition, a part of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 when viewed from the front. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side excluding the central portion of the lower plate body 324 is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. And an operation piece 342 supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310 and moved upward and downward by the vertical movement of the operation piece 342, and a ball feed unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and the contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 in the upper plate ball slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removal base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and rotating the opening / closing shutter 352 while lowering the lower dish A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and a closing portion 352a is biased by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower dish ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. Can be done.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide backward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is moved to the lower plate by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support substrate 430 having an opening 430a through which the button support tube 416b and the inner tube portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted on the upper surface corresponding to the ring of the dial operation portion 401. Are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405; It is equipped with.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower side than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends face each other and project inward, and these connection locking claws 410 b are provided in the dial operation unit 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the drive gear 412 is driven to rotate by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward / reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from above, and downward from the bottom. And a pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  The base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recessed portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached thereto. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw with the front cover 428 removed, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Thereby, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed and the impacts can be prevented from being concentrated. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to make the production using 401 (press operation unit 405) more diverse and less tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being lowered.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is, as a matter of course, the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c that detects the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and it is more effective for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 that is mounted and fixed at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A rotation position detection sensor 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that can be rotated by being engaged with 510a and that is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 and the rotation position detection sensor 512. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a that is fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a sensor support A single button 520 that is pivotally supported with respect to the member 514 and activates the firing stop switch 518, and a rotation handle body front 506 and a rotation handle body rear 504 that are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510 are initially rotated ( And a handle return spring 522 that urges it to return to a counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example has a hemispherical round shape that expands to the front side on the front end side, and a cylindrical shape with the rear end open on the rear end side. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on a cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through a slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotary handle. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotating handle main body abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508 so that the rotation range of the rotating handle main bodies 504 and 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the rotary handle main body front 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514, and the rotary handle body 504 is held by the handle return spring 522. , 506 are biased to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate, the rotation drive of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, The player can be prevented from playing a game different from the original, and the load (burden) associated with the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational driving of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then the emission control is performed based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine, It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frames 5 are linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration relating to the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and the player's interest is reduced due to a gaming ball driving defect. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, and a second A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the ball passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front is provided. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is rotated to the left in the front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end in the rear view of the cover base 542, respectively. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and also provides the player with a dish unit. Notification is made to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 supported so as to be rotatable around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, and the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a which are separated from the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b below the entrance port 581a and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 584. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotation axis side, and a rod-like flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance and suppress the interest, and the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301, so that the game The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, it relates to the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are Directional movement can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a that are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at the left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate that extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Shaped locking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

  As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the gaming window 101 having a vertically long elliptical shape, For driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is disposed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. Appearance with continuous integration.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. In addition, light emission decoration can be performed with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. By turning on and off the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256 that are arranged, the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same emission mode (the emission color and the emission pattern are the same), the overall illumination pattern can be made substantially uniform. If it is, it can be set as the light emission decoration which was interrupted in the circumferential direction. It can be made into a light-emitting decoration, and can attract a player's interest strongly.

  In the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die-casting, and the base member 420 is attached to the plate unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since the operation unit mounting portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed to bend and the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c through the cover 424 can alleviate the impact on the dial operation unit 401, the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, and can prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below. When the impact hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can contact the upper surface and receive the impact, it is possible to reduce the load on the operation portion holding member 416 and to prevent the gear rail 416a from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from the upper side, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced. It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered by replacing the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming center 101 in the left-right direction center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by side decorative frames 202 and 242 that are opaque (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the body inner portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guides 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend as far as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. Has been. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surfaces thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse light.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are provided. In this example, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decorations). Normal luminance lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the unit 280). In addition, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction. The upper center of the gaming window 101 is decorated. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a blue-tinged transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a white (milky white) member having translucency. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface, and can diffuse and refract light, so that the light passes through the transparent central lens 282. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to shine. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative board 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, and the rear lenses 284 and the lower lens 289. A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, respectively) on the left and right sides. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. In addition, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guides 318 a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decoration member 316 is lined up so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. When viewed from the front, the upper side front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 allow the outer side of the lower side of the gaming window 101 to be shown in the figure. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318, and diffuses and refracts light. In the same way as the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 is given a deep and sparkling brightness to guide it. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. In addition, the upper dish upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are not seen from the player side through the light guide 318a by the upper dish upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality of (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper pan right decorative substrate 320 and the upper pan left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Moreover, the surface (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the annular shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are set as the upper right side group 105. The portion (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. Group 106 is designated. The LED 286a of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately lit to decorate the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, or above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). It is possible to decorate the light emission in a V shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320 a corresponding to the light guide 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300 decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322 a is a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated with light emission, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems, a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three by three from the right side when viewed from the front. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit full color, and 3 in actual light emission control. It has doubled 84 systems. The LEDs 286b and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other. In actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to 8 systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing and the like are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  In addition, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 are provided. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to provide a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Moreover, in the 1st cyclic | annular group 102, the 2nd cyclic | annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light circulates the outer periphery of the game window 101 by light-emitting each system | strain 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 108a-108d suitably. Such as a light emission effect, or light moving toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, or light from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. Further, by emitting light individually from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

  Further, the central lens 282 as a whole emits light by simultaneously emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and light is rotated in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each of the systems 106a to 106c. Light emission effects can be performed. Further, the upper center side group 105 emits light so that the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, and the player has an opportunity and a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable game) State, short-time gaming state, short-time gaming state when probability change, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from the player's head toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 can emit light by decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109. Or a light-emitting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

  Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are the first close to the gaming window 101. Since the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be made to emit light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) are arranged. The pachinko machine can be decorated in a substantially concentric circle shape, and the light surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can produce a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly. 1 can be set.

  In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric circle, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light emission decoration can be made. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light emitting decoration can be obtained.

  Furthermore, LEDs 214b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are divided in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a plurality of annular shapes by causing the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light according to the gaming state. And I have never seen it on a pachinko machine so far It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  Further, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 constituted by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60). So that the light converges toward the gaming window 101, that is, the gaming area 1100 by emitting light in the order of the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102 from the outside to the inside. And can make the player's interest to the gaming area 1100, and can make it seem that there is something good in the gaming area 1100, which increases the expectation of the game. It can suppress that interest falls. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is something good for the light-emitting effect spreading to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light-emitting effects can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The player in the game hall can also show the above-mentioned light-emitting effects, attract the interest of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can do.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 that are radially arranged so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that extend in the circumferential direction in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by causing these radial groups 104 to emit light, it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decoration, The player's interest can be strongly attracted by changes in the light-emitting decoration. Further, the radial groups 104 arranged in a radial direction cause the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 in the circumferential direction. Since the LEDs 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are divided, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for each of the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j. Thus, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction. By providing a variety of light emission effects, the pachinko machine 1 that does not get tired can be obtained.

  Further, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lens portions 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Compared with the case where the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed, so that Even when the lighting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b, the annularly arranged LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a and the radially arranged LEDs 214b and 216b are arranged. , 254b, and 256b in the same light emission mode, it is possible to make an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 is integrated Thus, the light emitting decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  Further, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are partitioned in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially on one peripheral lens portion 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250. , 216a, 254a, 256a are made to correspond to each other, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light even if the appearance looks like one. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission decoration substantially concentrically, so that it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased, and the light emission Increase the impact of decoration and attract players' attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, the side inner lenses 212, 250 irradiate the side lenses 210, 250 by diffusing light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. 252 is provided, so that unevenness in the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be suppressed, the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, Even if 254a and 256a are used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape, so that a light emitting body that emits light in a linear shape (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) As compared with the case where the LED is used, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are individually made to emit light, thereby allowing the first annular group 1 to emit light. 2 and the second annular group 103 can also change the light emission in the circumferential direction, can present more various light emission effects, and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player due to difficulty in getting bored. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest.

  Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by random refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. The decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 placed on the board can be hard to see, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side and prevent the appearance from deteriorating. Can do.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 to irradiate the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b to be decorated with light emission, so that the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is long. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 irradiate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 widely with the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, sufficient space between the side lenses 210 and 250 is sufficient. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a that secure the space, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, so that the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is emitted from the radiating lens. It is possible to reduce as much as possible that the light from the portions 210b and 250b or the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b affects the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and the light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the light emission.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621 are engaged with and locked by the locking projections 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000, and the front end frame 602. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that allows the game ball to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly above. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stopper piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launcher 650 includes a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can restrict the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The award ball passage cover 780 in the award ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a when viewed from the back. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward to the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball presser plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not been made one level by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. In addition, when the game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and communicates with a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b and bends substantially in a letter shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. At the top of the back cover 742, a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attaching / detaching button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and relay board mounting The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and generates heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The award ball apparatus 740 of this example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It can be discharged to the outside outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 at 800.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. FIG. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 that opens at the right end of the view, and a full passage 775 that guides the game ball from the position away from the right side of the back view of the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side (see FIG. 79). A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 through the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the full tank is cleared when the game balls are full in the upper plate 301. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held by the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-down direction in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 with the contact portion 793 d of the opening / closing crank 793. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the launching power supply board box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass-reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above into an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat radiation holes on its upper and lower surfaces in order to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed has a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface communicating the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the launching power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. A wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to turn (turn back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 195) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and from the outside, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connecting terminal plate cover 873 is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 after the fixing piece 873h is inserted, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that passes through the connection notch 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection cutout portion 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  Further, the back cover 900 has a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated through the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are provided at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend long in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction of view (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 106). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a glass door slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front side right side (open side) side of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and the lower end portions of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusions 1004 are attached to the door hook holes 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attaching portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared to the case where the side surface 1001b is dense.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the upward engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact hole 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 and the cylinder lock penetration hole 611 up and down. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 mounted on the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 is discharged to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 that is attached to the rear side and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the award ball device 740 are rear. And a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as that of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. A pachinko machine that can visually check the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, it passes through the slit 916 or the like. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. It is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 115, etc.).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (or has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is alleviated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning concave portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 is viewed from the front side. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a horizontally long through-hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through-hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a corresponding range, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear surface in the rear surface, and a fixing portion. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 includes a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with the rear side opened, and a thin horizontal box shape with the front side opened to cover the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory 1184 and the first special symbol result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 made up of one 7-segment LED for display as the first special symbol display 1185 and the second start opening 210 A second special symbol display 1186 comprising one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the gate unit 2401 by a game ball that is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186 A normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2401 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED to be arranged, and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a “hit” A round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the open / close pattern 2103.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first starting port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbol on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2401. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  Also, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game symbol passes through the gate portion 2401 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a 10-round display lamp 1190a and a 15-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

  The function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 195). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has functions as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. As compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if a failure nail (not shown) is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The thickness is 8 to 10 mm. In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Furthermore, although details will be described later, the panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the attacker unit 2100, the center accessory 2500, and the like. The unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed (see FIG. 133 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower center and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 113 and the like) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 that is attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. This positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001 in the back box 3001. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is depressed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and whose lower end side is opened downward. A notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in a front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it is possible to set the panel plate 1210 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device with the panel holder 1220 held, and to suppress the cost for planting the failure nail. Can be done.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 107, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 for housing the game board 4 are provided. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. 3 When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing the second attacker unit in an easy-to-see manner, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from diagonally right front, and FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 113 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 114 is a perspective view exploded for each main member constituting the game board and viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and the game window 101 of the door frame 5 from the game window 101 to the player side when the front component member 1110 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front. A function display unit 1180 arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized, and a plurality of penetrating through the front and rear in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 And a plate-like game panel 1200 that defines the rear end of the game area 1100.

  The gaming panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel board 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110 and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component member 1110. A frame-like panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110. An opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  In addition, on the gaming panel 1200 of this example, a decorative seal 1102 having a pattern in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front side of the transparent panel board 1210 (see FIG. 113). The decorative seal 1102 is formed with an opening 1102a that penetrates a predetermined amount (for example, 0.2 mm to 1 mm) larger than the outer diameter of the obstacle nail G planted on the panel plate 1210. Thus, the decorative seal 1102 does not come into contact. By the way, when a shrinkage difference is generated between the decorative seal 1102 and the panel plate 1210 due to temperature change, secular change, etc., the decorative seal 1102 is pulled or pushed by the obstacle nail G that moves together with the panel plate 1210. The decorative seal 1102 may be wrinkled and look bad. However, since the decorative seal 1102 has an opening 1102a having a diameter larger than that of the obstacle nail G, only the gap between the opening 1102a and the obstacle nail G is provided. It is possible to avoid being pulled or pushed by avoiding contact with the obstacle nail G, and it is possible to prevent wrinkles from being generated on the decorative seal 1102 due to temperature change or secular change, The appearance of the gaming panel 1200 (in the gaming area 1100) can be maintained in a good state.

  This decorative seal 1102 is applied to a transparent film so that a pattern or the like is partially translucent. The decorative seal 1102 is a decoration of the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the transparent portion. The members 3064, 3065, the back-bottom front movable effect unit 3600, and the like are visible from the player side (see FIG. 109). Further, since the decorative seal 1102 is provided so that the pattern or the like has translucency as described above, the back left top decorative unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, the back left decorative member 3704 in the back left movable effect unit 3700, and the like. By emitting light in a planar shape, it is possible to emit light as if the pattern is self-lighting. As a result, the design (decorative sticker 1102) of the gaming panel 1200 that divides the rear end of the gaming area 1100 emits light, so that the design (the gaming area 1100) can stand out, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. The pachinko machine 1 can be attached.

  The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a rear side of the back unit 3000. A liquid crystal display device 1900 that is attached so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a substrate holder 1160 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, A main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the upper side of the out port 1151 in the lower part in the game area 1100. The front left movable effect unit 2300, the gate member 2400 disposed on the upper side of the front left movable effect unit 2300 and slightly on the left side from the center in the vertical direction in the game area 1100, and the substantially central portion of the game area 1100. And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is a box shape attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and opened on the front side, and a back box 3001 in which an opening 3001c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3001b. In the back box 3001, near the front surface, the back left upper decoration unit 3050 is arranged at the left corner in front view above the opening 3001c and can be decorated with light emission, and near the front surface in the back box 3001 and below the opening 3001c. , A ball guidance unit 3060 for guiding the game ball received by the front unit 2000 downward, a back middle movable production unit 3100 attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b in the back box 3001, and a back middle movable in the back box 3000 A rear-upper rear movable production unit 3200 disposed above and in front of the production unit 3100, and a rear-upper rear movable production unit. The back-front movable movable effect unit 3400 disposed on the front side of 3200, the back-bottom rear movable movable effect unit 3500 disposed between the ball guidance unit 3060 and the back-middle movable performance unit 3100 in the back box 3000, and the ball guidance A back-under-front movable effect unit 3600 attached to the front side of the unit 3060, and a back-left movable effect unit 3700 disposed on the left side of the opening 3001c of the back box 3000 and in front of the back-middle movable effect unit 3100. .

  The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 3001c penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear wall 3001b, and the display screen faces forward (player side) from the opening 3001c. A liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001.

  Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control board 4010 having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150 is provided, as will be described in detail later. Yes.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at an upper portion of the out-out 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and the attacker unit 2100. The front left movable effect unit 2300 that is arranged on the upper left side of the game area 1100 and extends from the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction, and on the upper left side of the front left movable effect unit 2300 A gate member 2400 that is disposed and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is disposed at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 1100 and supported by the gaming panel 1150 are provided.

  As will be described in detail later, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 has a first start port 2101 in which game balls can be received at all times, and a gate portion in the gate member 2400 that is disposed below the first start port 2101. A second start port 2102 that allows game balls to be received according to a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through 2401, and a first start port 2101 that is arranged below the second start port 2102 Two prize winning openings 2103 that allow the reception of game balls according to the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game balls to the second start opening 2102 and two on each of the left and right sides above the prize winning opening 2103. And four general winning ports 2104 which are arranged and are capable of receiving game balls at all times.

  Although the details of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 will be described later, objects positioned on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 on both the left and right sides of the big prize opening 2103 (for example, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1) Is provided with a pair of projector units 2150 (2150L, 2150R) that project a predetermined image. The projector unit 2150 makes it difficult for light to be irradiated (projected) to enter the player's field of view.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is formed so as to become lower toward the right in a front view, and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 is sent to the game area 1100. The rack part 2301a which can be guide | induced to the center side of the left-right direction in is provided. As will be described in detail later, the front left movable effect unit 2300 includes three decorative bodies 2302, 2303, and 2304 simulating lanterns on the lower side of the shelf 2301a, and can be swung according to the gaming state. Can be done. Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is formed to be paired with the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500.

  Further, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 is provided with a gate portion 2401 having a size that allows only one game ball to pass therethrough, and a gate sensor for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401. 2402 is provided.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially at the center of the panel plate 1210, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side is visually recognized from the player side. It is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be used. In the center accessory 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A peripheral wall 2503, a warp inlet 2504 that opens to a predetermined position of the peripheral wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 that discharges a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a game ball that is discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction And a stage 2510 for releasing into the game area 1100 and returning to the game area 1100.

  Although the details will be described later, the center actor 2500 has an object detection means 2530 capable of detecting an object located in front of the game area 1100 (player side), and a front view from the substantially upper center in the left-right direction. Logo decoration unit 2540 arranged along the arcuate outer periphery in the right direction, second attacker unit 2550 arranged below logo decoration unit 2540 and on the right side of stage 2510, and below second attacker unit 2550 And a front right movable effect unit 2600 arranged to be paired with the front left movable effect unit 2300 on the side.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. FIG. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the attacker unit, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear lower side. FIG. 119 is (a) a front view of the attacker unit, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). Further, FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a projection area by the projector unit of the attacker unit.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and then the game panel It is fixed to the front surface of 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of reception openings (winning openings) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the first start port 2101 disposed at the uppermost position in the approximate center in the left-right direction, the second start port 2102 disposed below (directly below) the first start port 2101, and the second start port A rectangular prize-winning port 2103 arranged below (directly below) 2102 and extending in the left-right direction larger than the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and a prize-winning port at a position higher than the big winning port 2103. 2103, a total of four general winning openings 2104, two on each of the left and right sides of 2103.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second starting port 2102 disposed below the first starting port 2101 is, as illustrated, a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 2102. Thus, the space between the first start port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 are pivotally supported at the lower end side, and the second starting port is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction away from each other. The game ball can be received in the field 2102. That is, the second start port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing member 2106 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable about a substantially lower side. In a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed so that a game ball cannot be received, and the upper side is directed forward. When it is rotated so as to move, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  The attacker unit 2100 has a width (width) in which the width in the left-right direction of the first start port 2101 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the game balls can be received one by one. Further, the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other and expanded to be three times the outer shape of the game ball. The width is about 5 times. Further, the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is in an open state, which is 5 to 8 times the width of the game ball. As a result, in a state where each of the winning ports 2101, 2102 and 2103 can be received, the lower winning port can receive game balls more easily.

  Further, the four general winning ports 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are opened upward on both the left and right sides of the large winning port 2103, and are arranged at higher positions away from the large winning port 2103. The one start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the prize winning port 2103 are arranged substantially symmetrically with respect to the axis line connecting the center in the left-right direction.

  More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the gaming panel 1200, and has a first start port 2101 and a big prize opening 2103 at a position corresponding to the center of the gaming area 1100 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming the second start port 2102 and the general winning port 2104, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the first start port 2101 in the base plate 2110 can be rotated. The center receiving member 2111 is formed with a second start port 2102 and opened on the upper and rear sides, and a general winning port 2104 opened upward is formed on the left and right front surfaces of the large winning port 2103 on the base plate 2110. And four side receiving members 2112 which are attached and open on the upper side and the rear side.

  The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, pivotally supports an opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the grand prize winning opening 2103, and rotationally drives the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening / closing member 2106. An attacker driving unit 2120 to be moved, and a predetermined object (for example, a player) that is attached to the left and right sides of the attacker driving unit 2120 at the rear side of the base plate 2110 and is located in front of the attacker unit 2100 (player side). A pair of projector units 2150 capable of projecting images.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a shallow relief-like decoration on the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and passes through the game ball at a position corresponding to the second start port 2102. In addition, the base plate 2110 includes a flange 2110b that extends backward from a position where the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are formed and can guide the game ball. Further, the base plate 2110 is formed at a position below the general winning port 2104 between the two general winning ports 2104 arranged on both the left and right sides of the grand winning port 2103, and the front lens of the projector unit 2150 is provided. A circular lens port 2110c is provided.

  The center receiving member 2111 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 in the attacker unit 2000 is formed in a fan shape with the front surface bulging upward. Although not shown in detail, the center receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions that extend rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by these shaft portions.

  Further, the four side receiving members 2112 are formed in a disc shape on the front surface, and are formed in a bowl shape in which the upper and rear sides are released.

  Further, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 includes a start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and a rear side of the base plate 2110 that supports the start port solenoid 2121. A start opening driving mechanism base 2123 attached to the opening, an opening / closing member 2106 for closing / opening the prize winning opening 2103, an opening / closing member 2106 for supporting the opening / closing operation, and an opening / closing member 2106 pivotally supported so as to be rotatable. An attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the start port drive mechanism base 2123, and a game ball received at the second start port 2102 supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A second start port sensor 2127 to detect, A count sensor 2128 that detects a game ball that is supported at a position different from the start port sensor 2127 and received in the special winning opening 2103, and a start port solenoid 2121, an attack solenoid 2124, and a second that are supported by the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A starter sensor 2127 and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

  Although not shown, the start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is urged in a protruding direction by a coil spring. The second start port 2102 is below the first start port 2101. The start port drive mechanism base 2123 supports the plunger so as to protrude forward at the rear position. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2121 moves backward against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces are connected via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is in an open state.

  Further, the start port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the start port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side. The first guiding portion 2123a that guides the game ball that has circulated through the portion 2110b rearward, and the gaming ball that is formed below the portion that supports the starting port solenoid 2121 and is received in the second starting port 2102 is guided downward. A second guiding portion (detailed illustration is omitted).

  Although not shown in the figure, the attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and that is urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, as with the start port solenoid 2121. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2124 is immersed, and the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 moves relatively forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The special winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 are in a state where they can always accept game balls. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, a pair of movable members are driven by energizing the starting port solenoid 2121 in accordance with a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 in a gate member 2400 described later. The piece 2105 is expanded and can be received. Also, in the big winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result (for example, the special lottery result is “big hit” by receiving the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (start winning prize). ”), The opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern and can be received by energizing the attacker solenoid 2124.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 includes a special prize opening decoration board 2131 supported on the lower part of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the upper surface, so that the inside of the special prize opening 2103 can be decorated with light emission. It has become.

  The two projector units 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 include a light-transmitting mounting base 2151 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, and a substantially cylindrical projector main body 2152 attached to the mounting base 2151 from the rear side. An attacker side decorative board 2153 mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2151 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a cover that covers the rear side of the attacker side decorative board 2153 and the projector body 2152 and is attached to the rear side of the mounting base 2151. 2154.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the projector main body 2152 of the projector unit 2150 is arranged at the rear of the main body and can radiate light forward (in this example, a high-intensity white LED is used). And a plurality of lens groups 2157 disposed on the front side of the light source unit 2156, and an image film 2158 on which an image to be projected that is disposed at a predetermined position in the lens group 2157 is depicted. The projector unit 2150 can project the image depicted on the image film 2158 onto an object positioned in the projection range in front of the projector unit 2150 by causing the light source unit 2156 to emit light. ing.

  In this example, the optical axes of the left and right projector units 2150R and 2510L do not cross each other, and images can be projected at different positions. In this example, the optical axis of the projector unit 2150 is set so that an image is projected onto the projection region TR from both shoulders to both chests for a player seated in a normal state on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. (See FIG. 120).

  In this attacker unit 2100, the game balls received in the first starting port 2101 and the four general winning ports 2104 enter the passage hole 3061a and the general discharge passage 3061b of the unit base 3061 in the ball guiding unit 3060 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is supposed to be sent.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 is discharged downward after the game ball received in the second starter port 2102 is detected by the second starter port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. ing. Further, the attacker unit 2100 is configured such that the game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged so that the forward / backward direction of the plunger 2124a is the left-right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged as close to the opening / closing member 2106 as possible. Therefore, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is configured so that two projector units 2150 allow other pachinko machines arranged on the opposite side of the object (eg, player, game hall) located outside the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Machine, wall, etc.) can be projected and displayed, can provide the player with a novel image effect that has not existed in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to entertain the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, when the projector unit 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 emits light according to the gaming state, as shown in FIG. 120, a predetermined image is projected and displayed on the projection area TR from the shoulder to the arm and chest of the player. However, since it is a position that is not directly noticeable by the player, a player who does not know the light emitting effect by the projector unit 2150 does not notice even if the effect by the projector unit 2150 is started. The game will continue. On the other hand, since the projection area TR is an area from the player's shoulder to the arm, the image projected from the projector unit 2150 is projected onto the front half of the player's shoulder, arm, etc. When viewed from the side, a part of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 can be seen, so that other players can easily notice the effect (coming opportunity) by the projector unit 2150. Therefore, other players than the player himself / herself notice the arrival of the opportunity first, and the people around the player become aware of the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 for the first time. Therefore, not only a player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1 but also other players together can increase the expectation of the game, and this pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. Can be done.

  In addition, since the projector unit 2150 displays an image on the player himself, the player can greatly surprise the player by presenting an image effect that has never been seen on a conventional pachinko machine. While being able to attract strongly with respect to the image etc. which are projected, a player can be entertained by the image etc. which are projected, and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  When a predetermined image is projected and displayed on the player by the projector unit 2150, the light emitting decoration is turned off or reduced in each of the decorative units and the like provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4. Thus, a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR illuminated by the light emission of the projector unit 2150 is reflected on the glass plate 594 of the glass unit 590 of the door frame 5 and can be seen by the player. This makes it easier to notice the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150, and the effect by the projector unit 2150 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the object detection means 2530 provided in the center accessory 2500 described later detects the seating position of the player, and the projector unit 2150 (2150L or 2150R) corresponding to the seating position of the player emits light. The predetermined image may be projected onto the player with certainty.

  Further, when the projector unit 2150 in the attacker unit 2100 detects an illegal act, the light source unit 2156 emits light.

[2-3. Front left movable production unit]
Next, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 124. 121A is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121B is a perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the front left movable effect unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the front left movable effect unit.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the horizontal center in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the lower side from the vertical center. It is fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to be in contact with the outer periphery.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example is a shallow box shape in which one side of the front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, the outer shape of the front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and the front side is opened. Unit body 2301, a lower left first decorative body 2302 that is disposed in the unit main body 2301 and that is rotatably supported at the upper end side and is shaped like a lantern, and a left side of the lower left first decorative body 2302 in front view A lower left second decorative body 2303 that is disposed in the unit main body 2301 and that is rotatably supported at the upper end side and is shaped like a lantern, and is smaller than the lower left first decorative body 2302, The lower left first decorative body 2302 is movably supported within a predetermined range, and is disposed on the rear side of the unit main body 2301. A lower left side drive solenoid 2330 for moving and driving the lower first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 and a lower left side drive solenoid 2330 are attached to the rear side and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2301, respectively. And a unit base 2304 that supports the movement support mechanism 2320 in cooperation with the unit.

  The front left movable effect unit 2300 includes an upper base plate 2305 attached to the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the rear end on the upper side of the unit main body 2301, and the rear end on the right side of the unit main body 2301 in front view. A right base plate 2306 attached to the front side of the unit base 2304 so as to extend rightward from the vicinity, a plate-shaped decorative member 2307 attached to the front left corner in the unit main body 2301, and an upper front end of the unit main body 2301 A front upper decorative member 2308 having a predetermined decoration, and a front lower decorative member 2309 attached to the lower corner of the unit main body 2301 and having the predetermined decoration.

  Further, the front left movable effect unit 2300 includes a left side decorative board 2310 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 2304 on the rear side of the unit main body 2301 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a left side on the rear side of the unit main body 2301. And a left decorative body decorative board 2311 which is disposed on the front side of the decorative board 2310 and attached to the front surface of the unit base 2304 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. Reference numeral 2312 in the drawing is a head cover that protects the tip of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the lower left side drive solenoid 2330. Further, the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is attached to the unit base 2304 so that the plunger advances and retreats in the left-right direction from the right side when viewed from the front.

  The unit main body 2301 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 has a box-shaped upper surface formed so as to become lower toward the right in a front view, and plays a game ball flowing down in the game area 1100. It is a shelf 2301 a that can be guided to the center in the left-right direction in the region 1100. Further, the unit main body 2301 is formed so that three-dimensional unevenness is formed on a bottom surface (a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200) formed in a box shape, and at least the bottom surface has translucency. Yes. The unit main body 2301 has an opening 2301b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper part of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 arranged on the front side through the opening 2301b of the unit main body 2301 and the movement support mechanism 2320 are connected to each other.

  As shown in the figure, the movement support mechanism 2320 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 is supported by the unit main body 2301 and the unit base 2304 so as to be rotatable about the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper end side is the lower left first. A drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 at the approximate center in the longitudinal direction, and a lower end at a position on the left side of the drive crank 2321 when viewed from the front. A hook-like actuating link member 2322 whose side is rotatably supported by a unit main body 2301 and a unit base 2304 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and whose upper end side rotatably supports the lower left second decorative body 2303; Actuate so that actuating link member 2322 extends substantially parallel to drive crank 2321 And a, a connecting member 2323 for connecting to each other in a rotatable state and upper side of the upper side and the driving crank 2321 of link member 2322.

  The drive crank 2321 of the moving support mechanism 2320 is configured to support and connect the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the connecting member 2323 with one shaft member on the upper end side. Similarly to the drive crank 2321, the operation link member 2322 is also supported and connected to the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the connection member 2323 by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are formed such that the distance between the pivot axis and the axis supporting the decorative bodies 2302 and 2303 is the same distance. When the drive crank 2321 is rotated by the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the movement support mechanism 2320 rotates so that the operation link member 2322 is always parallel to the drive crank 2321 via the connecting member 2323. Yes.

  As shown in the figure, in this example, the connecting member 2323 is formed in a curved shape. Although illustration is omitted, the front left movable effect unit 2300 is provided with a stopper for restricting the rotation range of the drive crank 2321.

  As shown in the drawing, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 are each formed in a shape imitating a lantern and formed in a plate shape. Further, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are formed to have translucency. Although not shown in detail, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are assembled as the front left movable effect unit 2300, and the lower left first decorative body 2302 is the lower left second decorative body 2303. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are shaken by driving the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 so that they do not come into contact with each other.

  The upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 include plate-like flange portions 2305a and 2306a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200, respectively. The front left movable effect unit 2300 can be attached to the game panel 2300 by fixing the flange portions 2305a and 2306a of the upper base plate 2305 and the left base plate 2306 to the front surface of the game panel 1200. Further, the upper base plate 2305 and the right base plate 2306 are formed to have translucency.

  The left side decorative board 2310 of the front left movable effect unit 2300 emits an LED mounted on the front surface, thereby causing the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 to be viewed from the front in the front left movable effect unit 2300. Also, the outer part can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the left decorative body decorative substrate 2311 can light-decorate the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light.

  Next, the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 in the front left movable effect unit 2300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 124 (a), the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example has a drive crank 2321 and an operating link member 2322 in a normal state (when the left lower side drive solenoid 2330 is not energized). From the vertical state, the upper end side is inclined by about 45 degrees in the right direction, and the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is advanced from the main body.

  In a normal state, the driving crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 are viewed from the front by the load of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 supported by the upper ends of the driving crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322. Although a force for rotating in the clockwise direction is applied, the driving crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are restricted from rotating further in the clockwise direction by a stopper (not shown).

  When the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized from this normal state, the plunger moves to the left in front view, and the drive crank 2321 connected to the tip of the plunger at the center in the longitudinal direction is centered on the lower end side in front view. It will turn counterclockwise. When the drive crank 2321 rotates, the operation link member 2322 connected by the connecting member 2323 also rotates in the same direction simultaneously with the drive crank 2321. In this example, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the drive crank 2321 and the operating link member 2322 are in a vertical state even when the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is driven (energized) to retract the plunger. On the other hand, the upper end side is inclined in the right direction when viewed from the front.

  When the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 are rotated in the counterclockwise direction by a predetermined range by driving the lower left side drive solenoid 2330, the lower left first decoration body 2302 and the lower left second decoration supported on the upper ends thereof. The body 2303 will also rotate. The lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are supported (axially supported) so that the upper ends thereof are pivotable, so that when the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 rotate, When an inertial force is applied to the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 and the rotational movement is stopped, the inertial force swings around the upper end pivotally supported by the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322. Will move.

  On the other hand, when energization of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is stopped in a state where the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 is energized (the state shown in FIG. 124 (b)), the plunger of the lower left side drive solenoid 2330 becomes free. At this time, the drive crank 2321 and the operation link member 2322 that support the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are in a state in which the upper end side is inclined in the right direction in a front view from a vertical state, as illustrated. Therefore, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 are rotated in the clockwise direction in front view by the load acting from the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, respectively. The force acts, and the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 rotate in the clockwise direction and automatically return to the normal position.

  When the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 return to the normal state, inertial force acts on the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, respectively, and the rotational movement When is stopped, the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 swing with a loose motion.

  Accordingly, the front left movable effect unit 2300 of this example causes the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303 to swing freely by repeatedly energizing and deenergizing the lower left side drive solenoid 2330. It is possible to entertain the movement of the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303, and to play an opportunity or the like by swinging the lower left first decorative body 2302 and the lower left second decorative body 2303. Can be made to suggest.

[2-4. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 115 and 116. The gate member 2400 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1215 formed on the left side of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the left side and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. Thus, it is fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The gate member 2400 has a gate portion 2401 having a width through which only one game ball can pass. The gate sensor 2402 disposed in the gate portion 2401 detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401. Be able to.

  Note that the gate member 2400 of the present example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate member, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1150 is the thickness of the game panel 1150. It will fit within. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2402 extends from the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

[2-5. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 134. FIG. 125 is a front view of the center character, FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the center character as seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the center character as seen from the back. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 130 is an enlarged front view showing the second attacker unit in the center accessory, and FIG. 131 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the second attacker unit. Further, FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the front right movable effect unit in the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the front right movable effect unit in the center accessory disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the front right movable effect unit in the center accessory.

  The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent plate-like panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and then the panel plate 1210. As shown in FIG. 108 and the like, it is provided with a large window portion 2501 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100.

  In the center accessory 2500, the shape of the outer periphery of the upper frame is linearly inclined at a steep angle from the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is lowered by a predetermined amount, and then gradually decreases toward the left. A plurality of step shapes which are inclined to each other. On the other hand, in the center accessory 2500, the outer peripheral shape on the right side of the upper frame is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. In the center accessory 2500, the outer periphery of the right half in a front view is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a plate-like flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game ball that bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and flows down in the game area 1100 from the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a peripheral wall 2503 that guides the game ball to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame. Further, the center accessory 2500 is a warp inlet 2504 that opens to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall 2503 located on the front side of the panel board 1210 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter (see FIG. 111). And a warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and after the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction, into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 And a stage 2510 disposed under the lower inner edge of the window 2501 for discharging and refluxing.

  The stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 is generally curved so that both ends in the left-right direction are raised, and the wavy shape is such that the position corresponding to the approximate center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is slightly higher. Is formed. This stage 2510 is formed on a lower upper surface (valley) on both sides with respect to the center in the left-right direction, and is formed with a guide surface 2511 that is widened in the left-right direction and tilted so as to become lower toward the front, and a guide surface 2511. A front wall 2512 that rises lower than the outer diameter of the game ball from the front end side, and a rear wall 2513 that rises higher than the outer diameter of the game ball from the rear end side. The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2505 can be discharged to the front side (in the game area 1100) through the guide surface 2511.

  The center accessory 2500 has a chance that the game ball can enter by opening forward in the rear wall 2513 on the rear side with respect to the position of the apex which is slightly higher corresponding to the substantially center in the left-right direction on the stage 2510. An entrance 2514, and a chance exit 2515 which is disposed directly below the chance entrance 2514 below the stage 2510 from which the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 can be released and opened forward. A game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 is released from the chance exit 2515 into the game area 1100. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, this chance exit 2515 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2515 has a high probability. It can be received (wins) into the start port 2101.

  In the center accessory 2500, substantially the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the back and rear movable movable effect unit 3500 and the like of the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side through the stage 2510 are visually recognized from the player side. Be able to.

  The center accessory 2500 includes an insertion frame-like portion 2506 that protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge side of the frame-like flange portion 2502 and is inserted into an opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210. And the insertion frame-shaped portion 2506 constitute a frame-shaped center main body frame 2520.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 closes the window portion 2501 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a transparent protective plate 2516 (see FIG. 128 and the like) disposed on the rear side of the stage 2510, and a game area 1100 (in the door frame 5). The object detection means 2530 capable of detecting an object located on the front side (player side) of the glass unit 590), and the right in the front view from the substantially upper center in the left-right direction within the width of the frame of the center accessory 2500 A logo decoration unit 2540 arranged along an arcuate outer periphery in the direction and indicating the concept of the pachinko machine 1; a second attacker unit 2550 arranged below the logo decoration unit 2540 and on the right side of the stage 2510; It is symmetrical with the front left movable effect unit 2300 across the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 below the attacker unit 2550. Includes a front right movable direction unit 2600 disposed location, the.

  The center accessory 2500 has a shape in which the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 on the right side from the approximate center in the left-right direction in a front view is substantially in line with the inner periphery of the game area 1100. In the attached state, a gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed from the upper part of the center accessory 2500 to the right side along the outer periphery of the logo decoration unit 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker unit 2550. The player can easily hit a game ball into the second attacker unit 2550 (second game area 2551) by making a right strike. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel board 1210, a region having a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 between the inner periphery of the game region 1100. .

  The object detection means 2530 of the center accessory 2500 includes an upper object detection sensor 2531 disposed at the periphery of the window 2501 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and a left object detection disposed at the left periphery of the game window 2501 when viewed from the front. A sensor 2532, a right object detection sensor 2533 disposed on the right periphery in a front view of the gaming window 2501, and a lower object detection sensor 2534 disposed below the right object detection sensor 2533 are provided.

  The object detection means 2530 receives a light emitting unit that emits detection light composed of invisible light such as infrared rays in a predetermined forward direction, and a reflected light of the detection light that is disposed adjacent to the light emitting unit and emitted from the light emitting unit. Each of which is capable of detecting a hand or the like of a moving player within a predetermined range in front of the game area 1100. In addition, the object detection means 2530 can detect the left, right, top, and bottom directions by the four object detection sensors 2531, 2532, 2533, and 2534, respectively. Based on the detection signals 2533 and 2534, the moving direction and moving speed of the hand and the like can be detected. Note that the object detection means 2530 can be operated at the time of an effect performed by a start winning prize, thereby enabling an effect that a player can participate in, and providing an effect with a sense of unity with the player to make the player more enjoyable. It is supposed to be.

  This object detection means 2530 enables the detection of each object detection sensor 2531, 2532, 2533 in a predetermined gaming state, and moves the hand in a predetermined direction in front of the game area 1100 to the liquid crystal display device 1900. An effect image for prompting the player to perform a predetermined effect by detecting the hand moved by the player in front of the game area 1100, and allowing the player to participate in the game effect. It is intended to enhance interest.

  Although not shown in detail, the logo decoration unit 2540 of the center object 2500 is arranged on the rear side of the logo lens, which is three-dimensionally shaped so as to have translucency and the logo characters are lifted. A diffusing lens member having a plurality of prismatic lenses, and a transparent logo unit base disposed behind the diffusing lens member and supporting the diffusing lens member; A frame-shaped center main body frame 2520 is attached to the front side. The center accessory 2500 is attached to the rear side of the center main body frame 2520 at a position corresponding to the logo decoration unit 2540, and a logo decoration board 2541 having a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) mounted on the front face, and the logo decoration board 2541. And a substrate cover 2542 covering the rear side.

[2-5A. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. The second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is disposed below the logo decoration unit 2540 at a position adjacent to the lower right side of the window 2501 when viewed from the front. The second attacker unit 2550 includes a second game area 2551 in which a game ball flowing down along the outer periphery on the right side of the front surface of the peripheral wall 2503 on the front side of the center main body frame 2520 can be circulated, and the second game area A second big prize opening 2552 that is arranged at a predetermined position in 2551 and can receive a game ball, a blade-like second opening and closing member 2553 that can open and close the second big prize opening 2552, and a second opening and closing member 2553 And a second attacker drive mechanism 2560 that is rotated according to the state to enable or disable the reception of the game ball into the second grand prize opening 2552.

  The second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500 defines the rear end of the second game area 2551 and is substantially flush with the flange portion 2502 of the center main body frame 2520 and extends from the flange portion 2502 toward the window portion 2501. And a plate-like rear end wall 2554 that extends in the front-rear direction at a position downstream of the second big prize opening 2552 in the rear end wall 2554 and can be passed through the second big prize opening 2552. And the second count sensor 2556 that detects the game ball received in the second grand prize winning port 2552, and the transparent circulation that can guide the flow of the game ball in the second game area 2551 A guide member 2570 and a second attacker cover 2557 attached to the front surface of the distribution guide member 2570 and provided with a predetermined decoration are provided.

  As shown in the drawing, the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a free end at the distal end side. Is formed in a blade shape (a shape similar to the cross-sectional shape of a wing such as an airplane). When the second opening / closing member 2553 is in a state of rising substantially vertically with the base end side as the lower side, the second big prize opening 2552 can be closed (closed state), Then, the second big prize opening 2552 can be opened (opened state). The second opening / closing member 2553 includes a pair of engagement protrusions 2553a protruding rearward from the rear surface on the base end side, and the drive from the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 is transmitted through the engagement protrusions 2553a. So that it can be rotated.

  Further, the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 of the second attacker unit 2550 is disposed on the rear side of the rear end wall 2554, and as shown in FIG. 131, a second attacker solenoid 2561 having a plunger that advances and retreats in the left-right direction. And a rotation transmission piece 2562 for rotating the second opening / closing member 2553 by transmitting the advance / retreat drive of the plunger in the second attacker solenoid 2561 to the engagement protrusion 2553a of the second opening / closing member 2553, A bracket 2563 that supports the second attacker solenoid 2561 and is attached to the rear side of the center main body frame 2520.

  The second attacker solenoid 2561 of the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 is supported by the bracket 2563 so that the plunger advances and retreats from the left side in a front view. Further, the rotation transmission piece 2562 of the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 is supported by the bracket 2563 so that the upper end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 can be rotated at a position above the portion where the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2561 advances and retreats. A lower end side that extends downward from the solenoid 2561 is inserted between a pair of engagement protrusions 2553a in the second opening / closing member 2553, and in the second attacker solenoid 2561 at a substantially middle portion in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). Connected to the tip of the plunger.

  Thus, when the second attacker drive mechanism 2560 causes the second attacker unit 2561 to advance and retract the plunger, the rotation transmission piece 2562 rotates about the upper end, and the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape. . When the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 moves in an arc shape, the lower end of the rotation transmission piece 2562 comes into contact with one of the pair of engagement protrusions 2553a in the second opening / closing member 2553, and the contacted engagement protrusion 2553a becomes The second opening / closing member 2553 is rotated by being pushed in the moving direction of the lower end of the rotation transmitting piece 2562.

  In this example, when the second opening / closing member 2553 is raised, that is, when the second big prize opening 2552 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. Is suspended substantially vertically, and the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2561 is in the forward position. Further, when the second opening / closing member 2553 is laid down, that is, when the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. And a plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2561 is in a retracted position.

  The distribution guide member 2570 of the second attacker unit 2550 forms a plurality of flow paths through which game balls can be distributed in the second game area 2551, and the game balls that have not been received in the second big prize opening 2552 are game areas. It can be released into 1100. As shown in FIG. 130, the distribution guide member 2570 includes an area entrance 2571 into which a game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery on the right side when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall 2503 and a game ball that has entered from the area entrance 2571. A deceleration flow path 2572 bent in a crank shape for reducing the speed, and a game ball supplied from the deceleration flow path 2572 are received and formed so that the left end side is lowered in a front view, and the game ball rolls to the left. A shelf-shaped branch guide shelf 2573, a first branch port 2574 that opens downward with a predetermined width through which a game ball can pass from the left end of the branch guide shelf 2573, and that can communicate with the second big prize opening 2552, and a first branch port There is provided a second branch opening 2575 that opens toward the branch guide shelf 2573 on the left side of 2574 and allows a game ball to pass therethrough and does not communicate with the second grand prize winning opening 2552.

  In addition, the distribution guide member 2570 includes a shelf-like branch opening shelf 2576 that is inclined so that the right end thereof becomes lower in the right direction from the vicinity of the lower end of the second branch opening 2575 and the front of the second big winning opening 2552. The second opening / closing member 2553 is wide enough to turn to the right as viewed, and the game ball that has entered the first branch port 2574 is allowed to circulate, and the second big winning port 2552 is arranged below the right end of the branch port shelf 2576. First flow path 2577, a first discharge port 2578 that opens to the downstream end of the first flow channel 2577 and can release a game ball into the game area 1100, and a second grand prize winning port 2552 disposed in the first flow channel 2577. A large inflow channel 2579 that communicates with the outlet 2555, a second channel 2580 through which game balls that have entered the second branch port 2575 circulate, and an opening at the downstream end of the second channel 2580 that opens the game balls to the game area Release into 1100 It includes a second outlet 2581, the.

  The first branch port 2574 of the distribution guide member 2570 has the right end as the left end of the branch guide shelf 2573 and the left end as the left end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the opening width (width in the left-right direction) is a game. The width is twice to three times the outer diameter of the sphere. The second branch port 2575 of the distribution guide member 2570 has an opening that is slightly wider (eg, 0.5 mm to 1 mm) than the outer diameter of the game ball. In comparison, it is difficult for game balls to enter. The second branch port 2575 has a lower end disposed at a position slightly above the top surface of the branch port shelf 2576 and is disposed so as to form a step with the branch port shelf 2576. Accordingly, even if the game ball rolls on the branch port shelf 2576 toward the second branch port 2575, the game ball does not easily enter the second branch port 2575 by contacting the step.

  The branch opening shelf 2576 of the distribution guide member 2570 is formed to be shorter than the width of the first branch opening 3574, and the lower side of the right end is the upper end of the second big winning opening 2552 in front view. Further, in the first flow path 2577 of the flow guide member 2570, a second opening / closing member 2553 is rotatably disposed at a position substantially immediately below the right end of the branch port shelf 2576, and the second opening / closing member 2553 is rotated clockwise. The first discharge port 2578 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2553 when it is rotated in the direction of (2) and is laid down (the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state). That is, when the second grand prize opening 2552 is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the first branch opening 2574 is guided to the second big prize opening 2552 by the second opening / closing member 2553 and is not released from the first discharge opening 2578. It is like that.

  In this example, a part of the distribution guide member 2570 and the second attacker cover 2557 are formed to be transparent, so that the inside of the second game area 2551 can be viewed from the outside (player side). ing. Further, in this example, the second count sensor 2556 is arranged on the upstream side of the discharge port 2555 in the large inlet flow path 2579 of the flow guide member 2570.

  In this example, the second attacker unit 2550 decelerates the game ball flowing down along the right outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500 once in the deceleration flow path 2572 and then moves leftward by the branch guide shelf 2573. It is designed to guide the movement. In the second attacker unit 2550, on the left side of the branch guide shelf 2573, a first branch port 2574 that can communicate with the second grand prize port 2552 and a second branch port 2575 that does not communicate with the second grand prize port 2552 are opened. The game ball that is rolled and released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters which branch port 2574, 2575, so that the player can be excited and entertained. It has become.

  When the game ball released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the second branch port 2575, the game ball is released from the second discharge port 2581 into the game area 1100 through the second flow path 2580. As described above, since the size of the second branch port 2575 is only slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, most of the game balls released from the branch guide shelf 2573 are directed to the second branch port 2575. It does not enter, but enters the first branch port 2574.

  On the other hand, when the game ball released from the branch guide shelf 2573 enters the first branch port 2574, the game ball is sent to the first flow path 2577. When the second opening / closing member 2553 is raised and the second big prize opening 2552 is in the closed state, the game ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is not received by the second big prize opening 2552, but at the lower end. It is discharged from the opened first discharge port 2578 into the game area 1100. On the other hand, when the second opening / closing member 2553 rotates in the clockwise direction in front view and the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, the game ball sent to the first flow path 2577 is It is guided to the upper surface of the member 2553 and received in the second big prize opening 2552, flows through the big incoming flow path 2579, is detected by the second count sensor 2556, and is then discharged out of the game areas 1100 and 2551 from the outlet 2555. It will be. In addition, when the second opening / closing member 2553 is in the open position, the first opening 2578 is closed by the second opening / closing member 2553, so that the second opening / closing member 2553 is sent to the first flow path 2577 through the first branch port 2574. A game ball is received in the second grand prize opening 2552. Note that, depending on the timing at which the second opening / closing member 2553 performs an opening / closing operation, even if a game ball enters the first branch port 2574, it is not accepted into the second big winning port 2552, and the game area 1100 is released from the first discharge port 2578. May be released into.

  Thus, according to the second attacker unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500, when the second opening / closing member 2553 rotates to the open position and the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, the peripheral wall of the center accessory 2500 When the game ball enters between the right outer periphery of the portion 2503 and the inner periphery of the game area 1100, the game ball is received through the first branch port 2574 and the first flow path 2577 to the second grand prize winning port 2552, so it is easy. The game ball can be awarded to the second grand prize opening 2552 by a simple driving operation, so that even a player who is not familiar with the pachinko machine 1 can easily enjoy it.

  Further, according to the second attacker unit 2550, the game ball is guided by the wall-shaped flow path by the distribution guide member 2570 in the second game area 2551 where the second big prize opening 2552 is arranged. Since the game ball is not guided by the nail, the guidance direction of the game ball is changed by tilting the obstacle nail due to the contact of the game ball or the like, and the probability of receiving the second big prize opening 2552 is changed. Can be reliably avoided, and the initial state can be maintained over a long period of time, so that the player can be fully entertained.

[2-5B. Front right movable production unit]
Next, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. The front right movable effect unit 2600 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged at a position symmetrical to the front left movable effect unit 2300 with the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 below the second attacker unit 2550. The front left movable effect unit 2300 is substantially symmetrical. This front-right movable effect unit 2600 is a shallow box-shaped unit in which one side in front view is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100, the outer shape in front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and the front side is opened. A main body 2601, a lower right first decorative body 2602 that is disposed in the unit main body 2601 and that is rotatably supported at the upper end side and is shaped like a lantern, A lower right second decorative body 2603, which is disposed in the unit main body 2601 and is rotatably supported at the upper end side and which is shaped like a lantern and is smaller than the lower right first decorative body 2602, and a lower right second decorative body The body 2603 and the lower right first decorative body 2602 are movably supported within a predetermined range and are disposed on the rear side of the unit main body 2601, and the right side through the movement support mechanism 2620. A lower right side drive solenoid 2630 for moving and driving the first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 and a lower right side drive solenoid 2630 are attached to the rear side and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2601, respectively. A unit base 2604 that supports the movement support mechanism 2620 in cooperation with the main body 2601.

  The front right movable effect unit 2600 includes a left base plate 2606 attached to the front side of the unit base 2604 so as to extend leftward from the vicinity of the rear end of the left side of the unit main body 2601 when viewed from the front, and a front surface within the unit main body 2601. A plate-shaped decorative member 2607 attached to the right corner, a front upper decorative member 2608 attached to the front end of the upper side of the unit main body 2601 and having a predetermined decoration, and a front attached to the lower corner of the unit main body 2601 and having a predetermined decoration A lower decoration member 2609.

  Further, the front right movable effect unit 2600 includes a right side decorative board 2610 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 2604 on the rear side of the unit body 2601 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a right side on the rear side of the unit body 2601. A right decorative body decorative board 2611 disposed on the front side of the decorative board 2610 and attached to the front face of the unit base 2604 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof. Reference numeral 2612 in the drawing denotes a head cover that protects the tip of the plunger that moves forward and backward in the lower right side drive solenoid 2630. Further, the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is attached to the unit base 2604 so that the plunger advances and retreats in the left-right direction from the left side when viewed from the front.

  The unit main body 2601 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 has a box-shaped upper surface formed so as to become lower toward the left in a front view, and in the second game area 2551 in the second attacker unit 2550. The rack 2601a is capable of guiding the game ball discharged from the first discharge port 2578 or the second discharge port 2581 to the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. The unit main body 2601 is formed so that three-dimensional irregularities are formed on a bottom surface (a surface parallel to the surface of the game panel 1200) formed in a box shape, and at least the bottom surface is translucent. Yes. The unit body 2601 has an opening 2601b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper part of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603. The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 arranged on the front side through the opening 2601b of the unit main body 2601 and the movement support mechanism 2620 are connected to each other.

  As shown in the figure, the movement support mechanism 2620 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 is supported by the unit main body 2601 and the unit base 2604 so as to be rotatable around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper end side is lower right. A driving crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger of the lower right side driving solenoid 2630 at a substantially center in the longitudinal direction, and a position on the right side of the driving crank 2621 in a front view. The lower end side is supported by the unit main body 2601 and the unit base 2604 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper end side is a hook-like operation link member that rotatably supports the lower right second decorative body 2603. 2622 and the operating link member 2622 operate so as to extend substantially parallel to the drive crank 2621 And a, a connecting member 2623 for connecting to each other in a rotatable state and upper side of the upper side and the driving crank 2621 of link member 2622.

  The drive crank 2621 of the movement support mechanism 2620 is configured to support and connect the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the connecting member 2623 with one shaft member on the upper end side. Similarly to the drive crank 2621, the operation link member 2622 is also supported and connected to the lower right second decorative body 2603 and the connection member 2623 by one shaft member on the upper end side. Further, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are formed such that the distance between the rotation axis and the axis supporting the decorative bodies 2602 and 2603 is the same distance. When the drive crank 2621 is rotated by the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the movement support mechanism 2620 rotates so that the operation link member 2622 is always parallel to the drive crank 2621 via the connecting member 2623. ing.

  As shown in the figure, in this example, the connecting member 2623 is formed in a curved shape in an arc shape. Although illustration is omitted, the front right movable effect unit 2600 is provided with a stopper for restricting the rotation range of the drive crank 2621.

  As shown in the drawing, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 are each formed in a shape simulating a lantern and in a plate shape. Further, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are formed to have translucency. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are assembled as the front right movable effect unit 2600, the lower right first decorative body 2602 is the lower right first decorative body 2602. The two lower decorative bodies 2603 are positioned in front of each other, and when the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are shaken by the driving of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, they do not contact each other. It has become.

  The right base plate 2306 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 is formed to have translucency. The right side decorative board 2610 of the front right movable effect unit 2600 emits the LED mounted on the front surface, thereby causing the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body in the front right movable effect unit 2600 in front view. A portion outside 2603 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the right decorative body decorative substrate 2611 can light-decorate the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 by causing the LED mounted on the front surface to emit light.

  The front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of this example is configured such that the upper part of the unit base 2604 is attached to the rear side of the center main body frame 2520.

  Next, the movement of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 in the front right movable effect unit 2600 will be described. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the front right movable effect unit 2600 of this example has the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 in the normal state (when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is not energized). The upper end side is inclined about 45 degrees from the vertical state toward the left, and the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is advanced from the main body.

  In a normal state, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are moved to the front by the load of the lower right first decoration body 2602 and the lower right second decoration body 2603 supported by the upper ends of the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622. Although a force that rotates counterclockwise as viewed is applied, the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 are restricted from rotating further counterclockwise by a stopper (not shown). Yes.

  From this normal state, when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized, the plunger moves to the right in front view, and the drive crank 2621 connected to the tip of the plunger in the center in the longitudinal direction is centered on the lower end side. Will rotate in the clockwise direction. When the drive crank 2621 rotates, the operation link member 2622 connected by the connecting member 2623 also rotates in the same direction simultaneously with the drive crank 2621. In this example, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), even when the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is driven (energized) and the plunger is retracted, the drive crank 2621 and the operating link member 2622 are in a vertical state. On the other hand, the upper end side is inclined toward the left in a front view.

  When the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 are rotated in the clockwise direction by a predetermined range by driving the lower right side drive solenoid 2630, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right first The two decorative bodies 2603 will also rotate. The lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are pivotally supported together with the rotation of the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 because the upper ends thereof are rotatably supported (axially supported). Then, an inertial force acts on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, and when the rotational movement is stopped, the upper end pivotally supported by the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 is centered by the inertial force. Will swing around.

  On the other hand, when energization to the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is stopped in a state where the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 is energized (the state shown in FIG. 134 (b)), the plunger of the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 becomes free. . At this time, the drive crank 2621 and the operation link member 2622 that support the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are tilted leftward in a front view from a state in which the upper end side is vertical as shown in the figure. Since it is in a state, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are counterclockwise as viewed from the front due to loads acting from the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, respectively. A force to rotate in the rotating direction is applied, and the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 rotate counterclockwise and automatically return to the normal position. Will be.

  In addition, when the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 return to the normal state, inertial force acts on the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603, respectively. When the rotational movement is stopped, the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 are swung loosely.

  Therefore, the front right movable effect unit 2600 in the center accessory 2500 of the present example repeats energization and non-energization to the lower right side drive solenoid 2630 as appropriate, so that the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decoration. The body 2603 can be swung freely, the movement of the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body 2603 can be enjoyed, and the lower right first decorative body 2602 and the lower right second decorative body can be enjoyed. The player can be informed of the arrival of a chance by swinging the body 2603.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 139. 135 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 136 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the rear unit is disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the rear unit is disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 300 of this example includes a back box 3001 that is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and has an open front side, in which an opening 3001c that faces the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3001b. Near the front surface in the box 3001 above the opening 3001c, the back left upper decoration unit 3050 is arranged at the left corner when viewed from the front and can be illuminated according to the game state, and near the front surface in the back box 3001 below the opening 3001c. Sphere that is arranged on the side and guides the game ball received in the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and the second large winning opening 2552 of the center accessory 2500 to a predetermined position below. The guidance unit 3060 is attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b in the back box 3001, and is opened according to the gaming state. a rear middle movable production unit 3100 that closes a part of c, a rear rear movable production unit 3200 that is arranged on the upper side and front side of the rear middle movable production unit 3100 in the back box 3000 and is movable according to the game state, A rear front movable production unit 3400 that is arranged in front of the upper and rear movable production unit 3200 and moves according to the game state, and a game that is arranged between the ball guidance unit 3060 and the back middle movable production unit 3100 in the back box 3000. On the left side of the rear back movable movable effect unit 3500 that moves according to the state, the front lower back movable effect unit 3600 that is attached to the front side of the ball guiding unit 3060 and moves according to the game state, and the opening 3001c of the back box 3000. A rear left movable production unit 3700 which is arranged in front of the back middle movable production unit 3100 and is movable according to the game state. To have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a horizontally long bottom substrate base 3010 attached near the lower end of the rear surface of the back wall 3001b of the back box 3001, a panel relay substrate 3011 attached to the rear side of the back bottom substrate base 3010, and a back box. 3001 is a plate-like oblong back base board base 3012 that is rotatably attached along the lower side of the opening 3001c on the rear face of the rear wall 3001b, a lamp drive board 3013 attached to the rear face of the back base board base 3012, and a back box 3001 is a vertically long rectangular back right substrate base 3014 attached to the left side in the rear view of the opening 3001c on the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b, a motor drive substrate 3015 attached to the rear side of the back right substrate base 3014, and a back box 3001 The back of a horizontally long plate attached to the upper side of the opening 3001c on the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b A substrate base 3016, and a back on the rear relay board 3017 attached to the rear side of the back substrate base 3016, a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is a shallow box-like back left upper substrate base 3018 that is attached to the upper left corner in a front view inside the back box 3001 and opened in the right direction, and a back left attached to the right side of the back left upper substrate base 3018. A relay board 3019 and a wiring support member 3020 extending in the vertical direction and attached to the vicinity of the front end of the right side surface in the back box 3001 are provided.

  Although not shown, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 on the right side of the opening 3001c in the rear view and substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is attached to and detached from the rear side of the back box 3001. A lock member is provided for holding the cover.

  Although detailed description of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is omitted, the back upper left decoration unit 3050, the ball guidance unit 3060, the back middle movable effect unit 3100, the back upper rear movable effect unit 3200, A front movable effect unit 3400, a rear back and rear movable effect unit 3500, a back bottom front movable effect unit 3600, a back left movable effect unit 3700, each substrate base 3010, 3012, 3014, 3016, 3018, a wiring support member 3020, and the like. It has mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting.

  Further, the back box 3001 includes a flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portion 3001a. Further, as shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the back box 3001 includes a fixed frame piece 3001d that extends rearward in a frame shape on the rear surface side of the rear wall 3001b from the periphery of the opening 3001c at a position outside the predetermined width, and a fixed frame piece. An insertion recess formed in a predetermined position of 3001d and into which the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the fixed frame piece 3001d from the rear side.

[2-7. Back upper left decorative unit]
Next, the back upper left decoration unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the back upper decoration unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper left front end in a front view of the back box 3001, and the upper end is attached to the upper front edge of the back box 3001. A lower end is attached to the upper part of the back left movable production | presentation unit 3700 mentioned later. The back left top decorative unit 3050 is a shallow box-like light-transmitting back left top decorative member 3051 that is decorated on the front and opened at the back, and a base member 3052 that closes the rear end of the back left top decorative member 3051. And a back upper left decorative board (not shown) mounted on the front side of the base member 3052 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface.

  This back upper decoration unit 3050 is formed in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 formed in a substantially circular shape, and the back left upper decoration board LED provided inside emits light. The upper left decorative member 3051 can be appropriately decorated with light emission in a planar shape. By light-emitting the back upper left decorative member 3051 in a planar shape, the corresponding part of the decorative seal 1102 attached to the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) that defines the rear end of the game area 1100 can be brightly decorated. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 more conspicuous by making the inside of the game area 1100 brighter.

[2-8. Ball guidance unit]
Next, the ball guiding unit 3060 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. The ball guiding unit 3060 of the present example is arranged at a front end in the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 and at a position below the opening 3001c, and in the state where it is assembled to the game board 4, the rear side of the center accessory 2500 Thus, it is positioned below the stage 2510. In addition, the ball guiding unit 3060 includes the game balls received in the first starting port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, and the second big winning port of the second attacker unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500. The game ball received in 2552 can be received and guided and discharged downward.

  The ball guiding unit 3060 includes a unit base 3061 attached to the lower part of the front end of the back box 3001 and extending in the left-right direction; A transparent substrate cover 3063 covering the front surface of the lower stage decorative substrate 3062, a lower stage left decorative member 3064 and a lower stage right decorative member 3065 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3061 along the lower edge of the substrate cover 3063, It has.

  As shown in the figure, the ball guiding unit 3060 is formed in a loose V shape in which the shape of the upper end of the unit base 3061 is lowered at the center in the left-right direction, and the lower stage decoration board 3062 and the board cover 3063 are also unit. It is formed in a loose V shape along the upper end of the base 3061. A unit base 3061 of the ball guiding unit 3060 is disposed in the center in the left-right direction, and is received in the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and through which a game ball guided rearward by the flange 2110b can pass. 3061a, a general discharge passage 3061b that receives the game ball received by the general winning opening 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 and guided backward by the collar 2110b and guides it downward, and the second large winning opening 2552 in the center accessory 2500. And a second discharge passage 3061c for receiving the game ball guided from the discharge port 2555 to the rear of the center accessory 2500 and guiding it downward.

  The general discharge passage 3061b of the unit base 3061 is formed at a position corresponding to each of the four general winning ports 2104 in the attacker unit 2100. It forms so that it may join after receiving and it will discharge | emit downward from one place. Further, the general discharge passage 3061b has a configuration in which the front side is opened, and the front end side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100 or the rear surface of the panel plate 1210 so that the game ball does not fall forward. .

  Also, the second discharge passage 3061c of the unit base 3061 is guided to the lower part of the unit base 3061 on the front side of the unit base 3061 after receiving the game ball from the second big prize opening 2552 at the upper part of the unit base 3061. Thus, the unit base 3061 is guided to the rear side through the opening penetrating the unit base 3061, and further guided to the center side position in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit base 3061 to be discharged downward. The second discharge passage 3061c is configured such that the front side is open on the front side of the unit base 3061, and the front end side is closed by a plate-like second discharge passage cover 3066.

  The ball guiding unit 3060 further includes a first discharge passage member 3067 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3061 and guides and discharges the game ball that has passed through the passage hole 3061a of the unit base 3061 downward. Although not shown in the drawing, the first discharge passage member 3067 is configured such that the front is open and the front end is closed by the rear surface of the unit base 3061. Further, the first discharge passage member 3067 is formed so as to guide the game ball that has passed through the passage hole 3061a from the front side in the lower left direction in a rear view and discharge the game ball downward from a position adjacent to the second discharge passage 3061c. .

  Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 includes a back left lower relay board 3068 attached to the left end front surface of the unit base 3061 and a back lower right relay board 3069 attached to the right end front face of the unit base 3061.

  Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 is attached to a predetermined position of the first discharge passage member 3067 and detects a game ball received by the first start port 2101 and a general discharge passage 3061c in the unit base 3061. For detecting a game ball received at the general winning opening 2104 and a general winning opening sensor 3071 for detecting a game ball received at the general winning opening 2104 and a position adjacent to the passage hole 3061a at the center in the left-right direction of the unit base 3061. A magnetic detection sensor 3072.

  In this example, four general winning opening sensors 3071 in the ball guiding unit 3060 are provided. For the general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left and right sides of the attacker unit 2100 and close to the large winning opening 2103, In the discharge passage 3061a, only the general winning opening sensor 3071 is detected, and the general winning opening 2104 arranged at a position far from the big winning opening 2103 has two in the general discharge passage 3061a. It is detected by a general winning opening sensor 3071. As a result, it is possible to determine in which general winning opening 2104 the game ball has been received.

  Further, the magnetic detection sensor 3072 of the ball guiding unit 3060 can detect magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraud using a magnet or the like.

  The game balls guided downward by the general discharge passage 3061b, the second discharge passage 3061c, and the first discharge passage member 3067 of the ball guiding unit 3060 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and the substrate holder 1160 The out ball discharge portion 1161 is discharged below the game board 4. Further, the ball guiding unit 3060 can make the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED mounted on the under-stage decoration substrate 3062 to emit light.

[2-9. Backward movable production unit]
Next, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 153. 142 is a front view of the back middle movable production unit in the back unit, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the back middle movable production unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the back middle movable production unit viewed from the rear. It is. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back middle movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 146 is an exploded view of the back middle movable effect unit for each main member. FIG. Further, FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the back middle drive mechanism in the back middle movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is a rear perspective view of the back middle drive mechanism in the back middle movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 149 is an exploded oblique view of the back middle drive mechanism for each main member and is seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded view of the back middle drive mechanism for each main member and the rear view. FIG. In addition, FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back middle movable effect unit.

  The back middle movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the rear wall 3001b so as to close the opening 3001c from the front side in the back box 3001. This inside movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001b in the back box 3001, and has an opening window 3101a that is substantially the same size as the opening 3001c and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The back middle unit base 3101, the vertically long rectangular left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R which are disposed on the front side of the back middle unit base 3101 and whose vertical direction is higher than the height of the opening window 3101a, and the left door member 3120L The right door member 3120R is driven to move in the left-right direction between a position outside the opening window 3101a and a position on the front side of the opening window 3101a according to the gaming state, and is below the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101. And a middle back drive mechanism 3150 attached to the front side.

  In addition, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the front upper end of the back middle unit base 3101 and restricts the upper ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R from moving forward so that the rear middle unit base 3101 has substantially the full width. A plate-like back middle upper decorative member 3102 extending in the left-right direction, and a back middle unit base mounted along the lower end of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101 on the front side of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R A plate-shaped back middle and lower decorative member 3103 extending in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of 3101 and a rear middle upper decorative member 3102 and a back middle disposed on the right side of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101. A plate-like back middle right front decoration member 3104 and a left door member 3120L respectively attached to the front surface of the lower decoration member 3103 The rear middle unit base 3101 is attached to the left front surface of the opening window 3101a and is substantially the same height as the opening window 3101a and has a plate-like back middle left decorative member 3105 and the rear side behind the right door member 3120R. The unit base 3101 includes a plate-shaped back middle right decorative member 3106 which is attached to the right front surface of the opening window 3101a and is substantially the same height as the opening window 3101a.

  Further, the back middle movable effect unit 3100 has a position detection sensor attached to the rear side of the back middle unit base 3101 and below the opening window 3101a and capable of detecting the movement positions of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R. A back middle relay board 3108 and a board cover 3109 that covers the rear surface of the back middle relay board 3108 and is attached to the rear side of the back middle unit base 3101 are provided. This back intermediate relay board 3108 relays the connection of the position detection sensor 3108a, the door decoration board 3125, the left door drive motor 3161, and the right door drive motor 3181 with the lamp drive board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015. It is. As shown in FIG. 145, the back middle relay board 3108 is provided with a position detection sensor 3108a, and the position detection sensor 3108a causes the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R to be on the left side of the opening window 3101a, respectively. The left door member 3120 </ b> L and the right door member 3120 </ b> R are arranged so as to be able to detect that the left door member 3120 </ b> L and the right door member 3120 </ b> R are located at the center appearance position where they are in contact with each other.

  Reference numeral 3110 in the drawing is a wiring retainer for fixing a wiring for connecting the door decoration board 3125 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R (not shown) and the back intermediate relay board 3108.

  The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 are formed in a shape simulating a bag, and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are formed in substantially bilaterally symmetrical shapes. ing. The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are arranged on the rear side of the frame body 3121 and the frame body 3121 in a form in which both the left and right sides extend vertically with respect to the vertically long rectangular frame shape imitating the soft brocade of the fence. A transparent plate-like door main body 3122 to be arranged, a movable base 3123 attached to the lower end of the door main body 3122 and guided to the left and right by a back middle drive mechanism 3150, and a back middle unit base attached to the upper end of the door main body 3122 An upper guide member 3124 that is slidably guided between the rear wall 3101 and the back middle upper decorative member 3102, and a through hole that is disposed on the rear side of the door body 3122 and corresponds to the central opening in the frame 3121. A door decoration board 3125 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and substantially the same shape as the door decoration board 3125 and between the door decoration board 3125 and the door body 3122 Light guide member for guiding light to the frame body from the LED in location to the door decorated substrate 3125 (not shown) is provided with a.

  The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R have a plate-like door body 3122 formed transparently, and are members (decorations) arranged on the rear side through a vertically long rectangular opening formed in the center of the frame 3121. Members, the liquid crystal display device 1900, etc.) can be visually recognized. In addition, the frame 3121 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the door decoration board 3125 to emit light.

  Further, the movable base 3123 of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R has a guide hole 3123a that penetrates in the left-right direction and into which the rail shaft 3151 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is inserted, and a drive belt 3165 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150. A belt fixing portion 3123b fixed to 3185, and a detection piece 3123c that extends rearward and can be detected by a position detection sensor provided on the back intermediate relay substrate 3108.

  The left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided by the rail shaft 3152 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by inserting the rail shaft 3151 of the back middle drive mechanism 3150 into the guide hole 3123a of the movable base 3123. It has become. In addition, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are configured such that the position in the front-rear direction is guided by the single rail shaft 3151 in the left-right direction at the same position, and the sides facing each other are brought into contact with each other. Thus, one large surface can be formed. Further, as described above, since the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are guided in the left-right direction by one rail shaft 3151, they cannot overlap each other in the front-rear direction and cannot be overtaken. Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 is a long rail shaft that slidably guides the lower ends of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the left-right direction. 3151 and a body base 3152 that supports both ends of the rail shaft 3151 and is formed by bending a metal plate. The rail shaft 3151 in the back middle drive mechanism 3150 is formed in a cylindrical shape. Further, the main body base 3152 of the middle back drive mechanism 3150 includes a main body 3152a having a substantially U-shaped cross-section with the front open and extending in the left-right direction, and extending upward from both upper ends of the main body 3152a. A rail support piece 3152b to be supported and a fixed piece 3152c extending forward from both lower ends of the main body 3152a are provided. The main body base 3152 is formed with mounting holes, openings, and the like at appropriate positions.

  Further, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 has a plate-like left base 3160 fixed to the upper side of the left fixed piece 3152c in the front view of the main body base 3152 and a left base 3160 penetrating from the lower side so that the rotation shaft is upward. A left door drive motor 3161 attached to the lower side of the left fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152, a left drive gear 3162 fixed to the rotating shaft of the left drive motor 3161, and a driven gear 3163a meshing with the left drive gear 3162 And a drive pulley 3163b that rotates integrally with the lower side of the driven gear 3163a and is rotatably supported by the left base 3160 and the main body base 3152, and the same as the drive pulley 3163b in the left drive rotator 3163 At the height, on the left side of the right fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152 The left driven pulley 3164, the left driven pulley 3164 wound around the left driven pulley 3164 and the driving pulley 3163b of the left driving rotating body 3163, the left driven pulley 3164 is rotatably supported and the main body base 3152 is supported. A pulley support member 3166 slidably mounted in the left-right direction, a spring fixing member 3167 fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the left side of the pulley support member 3166, and between the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley support member 3166 A tension spring 3168 that urges the spring fixing member 3167 and the pulley support member 3166 away from each other, a gear cover 3169 that is attached to the upper side of the left base 3160 and covers the upper side of the left drive gear 3162, It has.

  Further, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 has a plate-like right base 3180 fixed to the upper side of the right fixed piece 3152c in the front view of the main body base 3152 and the right base 3180 penetrating from the lower side so that the rotation shaft is upward. A right door drive motor 3181 attached to the lower side of the right fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152, a right drive gear 3182 fixed to the rotation shaft of the right drive motor 3181, and a driven gear 3183a meshing with the right drive gear 3182. , And a drive pulley 3183b that integrally rotates on the upper side of the driven gear 3183a, a right drive rotator 3183 that is rotatably supported by the right base 3180 and the main body base 3152, and the same height as the drive pulley 3183b in the right drive rotator 3183 Now, on the right side of the left side fixed piece 3152c in the main body base 3152. The right driven pulley 3184, the right driven pulley 3184 wound around the right driven pulley 3184 and the driving pulley 3183b of the right driving rotating body 3183, and the right driven pulley 3184 are rotatably supported and supported by the main body base 3152. A pulley support member 3186 slidably mounted in the left-right direction, a spring fixing member 3187 fixed to the main body base 3152 at a position on the right side of the pulley support member 3186, and between the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley support member 3186. A tension spring 3188 that urges the spring fixing member 3187 and the pulley support member 3186 in directions away from each other, a gear cover 3189 that is attached to the upper side of the right base 3180 and covers the upper side of the right drive gear 3182; It has.

  As shown in the figure, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 has a right drive belt 3185 disposed above the left drive belt 3165. Further, in the back middle drive mechanism 3150, the belt fixing portion 3123b of the movable base 3123 in the left door member 3120L is fixed to a portion located on the front side of the left drive belt 3165 that is circulated by the drive pulley 3163b and the left driven pulley 3164, and The belt fixing portion 3123b of the movable base 3123 in the right door member 3120R is fixed to a portion located on the front side of the right driving belt 3185 that is circulated by the driving pulley 3183b and the right driven pulley 3184 (see FIG. 143 and the like). ).

  The middle back drive mechanism 3150 is further provided with a protective member 3153 that is attached to a predetermined position of the main body 3152a of the main body base 3152 and prevents the left driving belt 3165 and the right driving belt 3185 from contacting the main body base 3152. ing. The protection member 3153 is attached so that a portion extending in the vertical direction and projecting forward in a semi-cylindrical shape projects forward from a surface extending in the vertical direction in the main body 3152a of the main body base 3152, and rotates around the left drive. When the belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 are bent, they come into line contact before the main body base 3152, and the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 are in surface contact with the main body base 3152. Thus, the left driving belt 3165 and the right driving belt 3185 can be prevented from wearing out early.

  This back middle drive mechanism 3150 rotates the left drive belt 3165 by the left door drive motor 3161 so that the left door member 3120L is entirely moved to the left side from the left end in front of the opening window 3101a in the back middle unit base 3101. It can be moved in the left-right direction between the retracted position and the maximum appearance position where the right end of the left door member 3120L is located slightly to the left from the right end of the opening window 3101a. Further, the back middle drive mechanism 3150 rotates the right drive belt 3185 by the right door drive motor 3181 so that the right door member 3120R is entirely moved to the right side from the right end in the back middle unit base 3101 when viewed from the front of the opening window 3101a. The left door of the right door member 3120R can be moved in the left-right direction between the left end of the opening window 3101a and the maximum appearance position located slightly to the right.

  Next, the movement of the back movable movable effect unit 3100 of this example will be described. The back middle movable effect unit 3100 can move the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R in the left-right direction by rotationally driving the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181 according to the gaming state. It is like that. In the back movable movable unit 3100, in a normal state, the left door member 3120 </ b> L and the right door member 3120 </ b> R are in a retracted position where the left door member 3120 </ b> R and the right door member 3120 </ b> R are located on the left side and the right side, respectively, as viewed from the front. It has become. In this retracted position, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are positioned outside the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and do not block the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display means 1900. (See FIG. 108 and the like). In the retracted position, the left door member 3120L is positioned on the rear side of the back left movable effect unit 3700, which will be described later, and the right door member 3120R is positioned on the rear side of the back center right front decoration member 3104, The door member 3120R is almost invisible to the player.

  When the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181 are driven to rotate in appropriate directions while the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are in the retracted positions, respectively, the left drive belt 3165 and the right drive belt 3185 rotate ( The left door member 3120L moves in the right direction, and the right door member 3120R moves in the left direction. When the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R move to the right and left, respectively, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is gradually blocked from the left and right by the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R, and the display area becomes narrower. Such a movable production can be performed. When the left end of the left door member 3120L and the left end of the right door member 3120R come into contact with each other at a substantially center in the left-right direction and the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R move to the center appearance position, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 The screen can be closed (see FIG. 151 (a)).

  As shown in FIGS. 151 (b) and 151 (c), the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R are independently moved in the left-right direction by the left door drive motor 3161 and the right door drive motor 3181, respectively. Therefore, only the left door member 3120L or only the right door member 3120R can be moved (appears) to the front side of the liquid crystal display means 1900.

  By the way, since the rear side of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R of the back middle movable effect unit 3100 can be seen through the vertically long rectangular opening of the frame body 3121, the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R. Is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, an image corresponding to the opening of the frame 3121 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player is as if the left door member 3120L and the right It is possible to make an illusion that an image is displayed on the door member 3120R. Therefore, the decoration (the pattern of the heel) of the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R can be changed variously, and the pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired can be obtained. In addition, a moving image may be displayed as an image, thereby causing the player to have the illusion that the left door member 3120L and the right door member 3120R themselves are display means such as a liquid crystal display device. Therefore, it is possible to perform a collaboration effect between an image effect and a movable effect, and to provide a variety of effects to the player.

[2-10. Backward-movable production unit]
Next, the back-up / down movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 152 to 168. 152 is a front view of the rear rear movable production unit in the rear unit, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the rear rear movable production unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 154 is a rear view of the rear rear movable production unit. FIG. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear movable stage production unit divided into an arm slide unit and an arm unit, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view showing the arm rear unit and arm unit. FIG. Further, FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the rearward movable movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the arm slide unit of the rearward movable effect unit as seen from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view. Further, FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward movable movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward movable effect unit as viewed from the rear.

  FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward movable movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the arm unit of the rearward rear movable effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the upper arm unit of the arm unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front after disassembling the forearm unit of the unit, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the rear after disassembling the forearm unit of the arm unit. Further, FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the movement by the arm slide unit in the back movable movable effect unit, and FIG. 168 is an explanatory view showing the movement by the arm unit in the back movable movable effect unit.

  The rear back movable movable effect unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 of the present embodiment is arranged above the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and above the back movable effect unit 3100. The rear rear movable production unit 3200 includes an arm slide unit 3210 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001b above the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and extending in the left-right direction over substantially the entire width of the back box 3001. An arm unit 3250 which is arranged on the front side of the slide unit 3210 and is slidable in the left-right direction by the arm slide unit 3210 and imitates an arm (a part below the shoulder) of a predetermined character.

[2-10A. Arm slide unit]
As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158 and the like, the arm slide unit 3210 in the rear rear movable production unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001c in the back box 3001, and is a shallow box-shaped and horizontally long rectangular shape. A slide base 3211, a slide rail 3212 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the slide base 3211 and extending in the left-right direction, a rack gear 3213 a guided in the left-right direction by the slide rail 3212 and extending in the left-right direction at the upper end, and an arm unit 3250 on the front surface. Are mounted on the slider 3213, the rack gear 3213a of the slider 3213, and the pinion gear 3214 that is rotatably supported by the slide base 3211. The pinion gear 3214 is meshed with the slide base 3211 at the left side of the pinion gear 3214 when viewed from the front. A first transmission gear 3215 that is rotatably supported, a second transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3215 and is rotatably supported by the slide base 3211 at a position on the left side of the first transmission gear 3214 when viewed from the front. A small-diameter small gear 3217a that meshes with the second transmission gear 3216, and a large-diameter gear 3217b that rotates integrally with the rear side of the small-diameter gear 3217a and has a larger diameter than the small-diameter gear 3217a, and the second transmission gear 3216 on the slide base 3211. A transmission gear 3217 that is rotatably supported at a position on the left side of the front view, a driving gear 3218 that meshes with a large-diameter gear 3217b of the transmission gear 3217, and is disposed at a position on the left side of the transmission gear 3217, and a drive gear 3218. And an arm slide drive motor 3219 which is arranged on the front side and to which the drive gear 3218 is fixed to the rotation shaft.

  The arm slide unit 3210 covers a front surface side from the pinion gear 3214 to the drive gear 3218 and is attached to the upper left front surface of the slide base 3211 and a horizontally long plate-like gear cover 3220 to which an arm slide drive motor is attached on the front side. A horizontally long slide guide 3221 disposed below the slide rail 3212 and attached to the slide base 3211 to slidably support the rear surface of the arm unit 3250, and disposed near the left and right ends on the front surface of the slide base 3211. A slide position detection sensor 3222 for detecting the position of the slider 3213, a sensor cover 3223 that covers the front side of the slide position detection sensor 3222 and is attached to the slide base 3211, and a slide base at a position on the right side of the front view of the pinion gear 3214. 211, an arm slide drive motor 3219, a slide position detection sensor 3222, and an arm unit relay board 3259 that are attached to the front surface of the 211, and a rear rear relay board 3224 for relaying the connection between the lamp drive board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015. , And a wiring retainer 3225 for holding wiring for connecting the back and rear relay substrate 3224 and the arm unit relay substrate 3259.

  The slide rail 3212 in the arm slide unit 3210 is an Acculide (registered trademark) slide rail. In addition, detection pieces 3213b extending upward are provided at both left and right ends of the slider, and the detection pieces 3213b are detected by the slide position detection sensor 3222 so that the slider 3213 (arm unit 3250) in the left-right direction. The slide position can be detected. Further, the gear cover 3220 of the arm slide unit 3210 cooperates with the slide base 3211 to rotate around the axis in which the pinion gear 3214, the first transmission gear 3215, the second transmission gear 3216, and the transmission gear 3217 extend in the front-rear direction. Can be rotatably supported.

  When the arm slide drive motor 3219 drives the pinion gear 3214 to rotate, the arm slide unit 3210 can drive (slide) the slider 3213 in the left-right direction by the rack gear 3213a meshed with the pinion gear 3214. The arm unit 3250 attached to the front surface can be moved in the left-right direction.

[2-10B. Arm unit]
As shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the arm unit 3250 in the rear rear movable effect unit 3200 has an arm unit base 3251 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 in the arm slide unit 3210 and a predetermined position in the arm unit base 3251. A first rotation shaft 3252 supported at the rear end side and extending in the front-rear direction, and an upper arm unit 3300 formed in a shape imitating the upper arm of a predetermined character with the base end side rotatably supported by the first rotation shaft 3252. An arm unit cover 3253 that covers the front surface of the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 and is attached to the front side of the arm unit base 3251 and supports the front end side of the first rotation shaft 3252; The upper arm unit 3300 is rotated about the first rotation axis 3252. An upper arm driving motor 3254, and a forearm unit 3350 which is arranged on the front side of the upper arm unit 3300 and is rotatably supported on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300, and has a shape imitating the forearm of a predetermined character. I have.

  The arm unit 3250 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper arm drive motor 3254 and is disposed between the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253. The arm unit 3250 meshes with the drive gear 3255 and is larger than the drive gear 3255. A large-diameter gear 3256a having a diameter, and a small-diameter gear 3256b that is disposed so as to be integrally rotatable on the front side of the large-diameter gear 3256a and that has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter gear 3256a and meshes with the upper-arm drive gear 3302 of the upper-arm unit 3300. And a transmission gear 3256 that is rotatably supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253.

  Further, the arm unit 3250 is attached to the front surface of the arm unit base 3251 and has an arcuate sliding ridge centered on a first rotation shaft 3252 that can come into contact with the rear surface of the arm unit base 3251 of the upper arm unit 3300. An upper arm rotation guide 3257 having 3257a, an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258 for detecting rotation ends in both directions of the upper arm unit 3300, which are attached to predetermined positions of the arm unit cover 3253, and a first rotation shaft 3252. The arm unit relay board 3259 to be attached to the front surface of the arm unit base 3251 and the front surface of the arm unit relay board 3259 at the position on the left side of the position in front of the position where the A plate-like substrate cover 3260 that is disposed and attached to the arm unit base 3251. .

  Further, the arm unit 3250 is attached to the upper front surface of the arm unit cover 3253 and the substrate cover 3260 on the upper side of the upper arm unit 3300, respectively, and extends upward, and the distal end portion of the upper guide bracket 3261. And a guide roller 3262 that is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and that can be brought into contact with the rear surface of a unit base 3401 in a back-front-front movable effect unit 3400 described later.

  Also, the arm unit 3250 includes a back upper rear relay board 3224, an upper arm drive motor 3254, an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258, an upper arm decoration board 3305, a forearm drive motor 3307, a forearm rotation position detection sensor 3316, and a forearm decoration body 3352. An arm unit relay board 3259 for relaying the connection to the arm unit, and a wiring cover 3263 for fixing the wiring for connecting the arm unit relay board 3259 and the forearm decoration board 3353 provided in the forearm unit 3350.

  The arm unit 3250 is inserted into the first rotation shaft 3252 and inserted into the cylindrical first bush 3264 for rotatably supporting the upper arm unit 3300 and the second rotation shaft 3351a of the forearm unit 3350. And a cylindrical second bushing 3265 for rotatably supporting the forearm unit 3350 with respect to the upper arm unit 3300.

  The arm unit 3250 and the arm unit cover 3253 are formed in a shallow box shape in which the rear surface, the left side surface, and a part of the bottom surface are opened in a front view, and the upper end of the upper arm unit 3300 is accommodated inside. Thus, the upper arm unit 3300 extends from the opened left side surface and a part of the bottom surface to the outside. One end side of an upper arm assist spring 3303 in an upper arm unit 3300 described later is locked to the arm unit cover 3253.

  The upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 is supported so that the base end side is rotatable with respect to the first rotation shaft 3252 supported by the arm unit base 3251 and the arm unit cover 3253 as shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 and the like. The upper arm base 3301 having a first shaft portion 3301a that extends in a plate shape in a predetermined direction, and a fan-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the first shaft portion 3301a in the upper arm base 3301 and that has a first rotation shaft 3252 as a center. The upper arm drive gear 3302 that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3256b of the transmission gear 3256, one end side is locked to the arm unit cover 3253, and the other end side is locked to the upper arm base 3301, and the first rotating shaft 3252 is engaged. The upper arm base 3301 so that the distal end side of the upper arm base 3301 rotates upward (clockwise in front view). An upper arm assist spring 3303 that applies a biasing force to 01, a, an upper arm decorative body 3304 that mimics the upper arm of the predetermined character covers the front with attached to the front of the upper arm base 3301.

  The upper arm base 3301 of the upper arm unit 3300 is formed in a cylindrical shape in which a first shaft portion 3301 a provided on the base end side extends short in the front-rear direction, and is first rotated through a first bush 3264 inside. A shaft 3252 is inserted. The upper arm base 3301 has a cylindrical second shaft portion 3301b that extends in the front-rear direction by inserting a second rotation shaft 3351a of a forearm unit 3350, which will be described later, on the distal end side, and an axial center of the second shaft portion 3301b. And a slit 3301c which is formed in an arc shape and can regulate the rotation range of the forearm unit 3350. The upper arm base 3301 is formed of a material having translucency.

  The upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 is such that the portion of the transmission gear 3256 that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3256b spreads in a fan shape in the opposite direction to the front end side of the upper arm unit across the axis of the first rotation shaft 3252. Is formed. Further, the upper arm drive gear 3302 includes a detection piece 3302 a that is detected by an upper arm rotation position detection sensor 3258 (see FIG. 163) attached to the arm unit cover 3253.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper arm assist spring 3303 of the upper arm unit 3300 is wound in a coil shape with the first rotation shaft 3252 as a substantial axis, and is bent so that the tip on one end side extends forward. The arm unit cover 3253 is locked at a predetermined position. The upper arm assist spring 3303 has a coiled portion disposed on the front side of the upper arm base 3301 and the other end extending to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through a through hole (not shown). It is locked on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 (see FIG. 162).

  The upper arm decorative body 3304 of the upper arm unit 3300 is disposed on the proximal end side in an insertion hole 3304a through which the first shaft portion 3301a of the upper arm base 3301 can be inserted, and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 3304a (upper left portion in front view). A motor mounting portion 3304b for mounting the forearm drive motor 3307 and a second shaft portion 3301b of the upper arm base 3301 formed on the distal end side are allowed to pass through, and the distal end penetrates in a fan shape to the outer peripheral edge of the arc-shaped slit 3301c. An opening 3304c and a passage hole 3304d extending in an arc shape around the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b on the upper side of the tip opening 3304c in the drawing are provided. This upper arm ornament 3304 is formed to have translucency.

  The upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 and mounted on the front surface with an upper arm decoration board 3305 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and is attached to the front side of the second arm portion 3301b on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301. And a plate-shaped protection plate 3306 having protrusions protruding rearward.

  Further, the upper arm unit 3300 includes a forearm drive motor 3307 that is attached to the motor attachment portion 3304b on the front surface of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and has a rotation axis extending rearward, and an upper arm decoration body that is fixed to the rotation axis of the forearm drive motor 3307. A drive gear 3308 disposed between 3304 and the upper arm base 3301, a driven gear 3309 that meshes with the drive gear 3308 and is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and a large-diameter large-diameter gear that meshes with the driven gear 3309. 3310a, a transmission gear 3310 that rotates integrally with the front surface of the large-diameter gear 3310a and has a small-diameter gear 3310b smaller than the large-diameter gear 3310a, and is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and a small-diameter gear 3310b of the transmission gear 3310 The drive gear portion 3311a that extends in an arc shape and the shaft center of the drive gear portion 3311a. A transmission rotating body 3311 that has a crankpin 3311b protruding forward from a position separated by a predetermined distance, and is rotatably supported by the upper arm base 3301, and a base end side is rotatable with respect to the crankpin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 And a hook-like link member 3312 whose tip side is rotatably supported with respect to the transmission pin 3351b in the forearm unit 3350.

  The upper arm unit 3300 has one end attached to the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the link member 3312 and the other end attached to a predetermined position of the upper arm base 3301. A forearm assist spring 3313 that is biased to rotate in a counterclockwise direction as viewed) and a forearm rotation position detection sensor 3316 that detects the rotation position of the transmission rotating body 3311.

  By rotating the transmission rotating body 3311 of the upper arm unit 3300, the crankpin 3311b revolves around a predetermined radius. The transmission rotator 3311 is provided with a slit 3311c extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis, and a restriction projection 3301d protruding from the upper arm base 3301 in the slit 3311c is inserted. Accordingly, the transmission rotating body 3311 can be rotated only within the range of the slit 3311c extending in an arc shape. The transmission rotator 3311 includes a detection piece 3311d extending rearward. The detection piece 3311 d extends to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 through the arc-shaped opening 3301 e of the upper arm base 3301, and the upper arm attached to the upper arm decoration board 3305 on the rear side of the upper arm base 3301. The rotation position detection sensor 3316 detects the rotation position.

  The upper arm unit 3300 further includes a lock bracket 3314 attached so as to cover a part of the forearm drive motor 3307 on the front surface of the upper arm decorative body 3304, and a lock pin 3315 extending forward from the front surface of the lock bracket 3314. Yes. The lock pin 3315 has the upper arm unit 3300 in the retracted position extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the arm base 3401 in the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 when the arm unit 3250 is set to the origin position by the arm slide unit 3210. The upper arm unit 3300 can be prevented from rotating downward by being locked by the locking piece 3401e and being locked by the locking piece 3401e (see FIG. 174).

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 has a predetermined amount of deviation from the second rotation shaft 3351a and the second rotation shaft 3351a extending backward from a predetermined position on the base end side. A plate-like forearm base 3351 having a transmission pin 3351b extending rearward at the centered position and rotatably supporting the distal end side of the link member 3312, and attached to the front side of the forearm base 3351 and the front surface And a forearm decorative body 3352 simulating the forearm of a predetermined character. In the forearm base 3351 of the forearm unit 3350, the transmission pin 3351b is disposed at a position obliquely lower left from the second rotation shaft 3351a in the rear view. The forearm decorative body 3352 is formed to have translucency.

  The forearm unit 3350 is disposed between the forearm decoration body 3352 and the forearm base 3351 and disposed between the forearm decoration board 3353 and the forearm decoration body 3352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. And a diffusing lens member 3354 for diffusing the light from the LEDs of the forearm decorative board 3353. The forearm unit 3350 irradiates the forearm decoration body 3352 with light from the LED of the forearm decoration board 3353 widely diffused by the diffusing lens member 3354, so that the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is substantially uniform. It can be brightly decorated.

  The transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 is inserted into a slit 3301c extending in an arc shape of the upper arm base 3301 in the upper arm unit 3300, and a disc-shaped end member is attached to the rear end. Thus, the slit 3301c cannot be removed. The forearm unit 3350 rotates only within the range of the slit 3301c of the upper arm base 3301 extending in an arc shape around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351a.

[2-10C. Arm unit movement]
Next, the movement of the arm unit 3250 in the back and rear movable production unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 167 (a) and the like, the arm unit 3250 of the present example is in a state where the arm unit 3250 is moved to the rightmost in the front view by the arm slide unit 3210 (the state of the origin position). Further, in the normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 of the arm unit 3250 extend in a substantially horizontal direction, and the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 overlap each other in front view. It is in a state. In other words, in a normal state, the upper arm unit 3300 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (in the storage position state), and the forearm unit 3350 overlaps with the upper arm unit 3300 (in the storage position state). ing. As a result, the arm unit 3250 can hardly be visually recognized from the player side. Further, although details will be described later, in this normal position state, the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is locked (locked) to the locking piece 3401e of the unit base 3401 in the back upper front movable effect unit 3400. In this state, the upper arm unit 3300 cannot be rotated in the standby position direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front).

  First, the movement by the arm slide unit 3210 will be described. As described above, when the drive gear 3218 is rotated in an appropriate direction (in this example, a clockwise direction in the front view) by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 from a normal state, the drive gear 3218 The rotation is transmitted to the pinion gear 3214 through the transmission gear 3217, the second transmission gear 3216, and the first transmission gear 3215. The rotation of the pinion gear 3214 causes the slider 3213 to move left and right via the rack gear 3213a meshed with the pinion gear 3214. It will slide in the direction (in this example, left direction when viewed from the front).

  When the slider 3213 of the arm slide unit 3210 slides, the arm unit 3250 attached to the front surface of the slider 3213 also slides together, and the entire arm unit 3250 is slid in the left-right direction (left direction) from the origin position. (See FIG. 167 (b)). Even if the arm unit 3250 is slid in the left-right direction by the arm slide unit 3210 in a state where the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decoration body 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decoration body 3352) overlap with each other, The arm unit 3250 is hardly visible from the player side.

  When the arm unit 3210 slid to the left from the origin position is returned to the origin position, the arm unit 3210 is driven via the slider 3213 by rotating the arm slide drive motor 3219 in the opposite direction. The whole can be slid rightward in a front view, and can be returned to the original position.

  Next, the movement of the upper arm unit 3300 by the arm unit 3250 will be described. From the normal state where the upper arm unit 3300 of the arm unit 3250 extends substantially in the horizontal direction (in the storage position), the upper gear drive motor 3254 moves the drive gear 3255 in a predetermined direction (in this example, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). , The rotation of the drive gear 3255 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 of the upper arm unit 3300 via the transmission gear 3256, and the entire upper arm unit 3300 together with the upper arm drive gear 3302 is centered about the first rotation shaft 3252. It will rotate so that the side may move downward (appearance position side).

  In this example, a transmission gear 3256 is disposed between the drive gear 3255 and the upper arm drive gear 3302, and the rotation from the upper arm drive motor 3254 is transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 while being decelerated by the transmission gear 3256. It has come to be. That is, the transmission gear 3256 is interposed so that the rotational torque of the upper arm drive motor 3254 is amplified and transmitted to the upper arm drive gear 3302 (upper arm unit 3300). The load applied to the drive motor 3254 can be suppressed.

  Further, in this example, the upper arm unit 3300 can be rotated within an angle range of about 90 degrees from the state of the substantially horizontal storage position to the state of the standby position hanging substantially vertically. (See FIG. 174 (c)). Further, the forearm unit 3350 is rotated about the first rotation shaft 3252 together with the upper arm unit 3300 by the drive of the upper arm drive motor 3254.

  When the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated from the storage position where the upper arm unit 3300 extends substantially horizontally to the appearance position where the distal end side is lowered below the base end side, the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 moves to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, It is visible from the player side. When the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated in the direction of the appearance position while the forearm unit 3350 is overlapped with the upper arm unit 3300, what is actually seen from the player side is not the tip side of the upper arm unit 3300. The proximal end side of the forearm unit 3350 is visible, and most of the upper arm unit 3300 is hidden by the forearm unit 3350.

  When returning the upper arm unit 3300 from the state where the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 is positioned lower than the base end side (state of the appearance position), the upper arm drive motor 3254 is moved in the direction opposite to the above. By rotating the upper arm unit 3300, the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 can be rotated upward, and the upper arm unit 3300 can be returned to the storage position.

  Next, the movement of the forearm unit 3350 in the arm unit 3250 will be described. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), when the forearm unit 3350 extends in a substantially horizontal direction and overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (normal state), the forearm unit 3350 is rotatably supported by the weight of the forearm unit 3350. A rotational moment that moves the front end side of the forearm unit 3350 downward (rotates clockwise in a front view) about the second rotation shaft 3351a acts on the forearm unit 3350. Then, due to the rotational moment acting on the forearm unit 3350, the crank pin 3311b is moved in the direction of the transmission pin 3351b to the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 via the link member 3312 connected to the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350. A pulling force will act.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), when the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300 (in the storage position), the crank pin 3311b in the transmission rotating body 3311 is connected to the center of the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b. The axis connecting the center of the transmission rotator 3311 is located above the center of the transmission rotator 3311 (a position slightly revolved to one side), and the restricting projection 3301d contacts one end of the slit 3311c of the transmission rotator 3311. It is in contact. In this state, when a pulling force is applied to the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 by the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350, the crank pin 3311b is counterclockwise as a direction to approach the transmission pin 3351b. However, since the restricting projection 3301d is in contact with one end of the slit 3311c of the transmission rotator 3311, the transmission rotator 3311 is further rotated counterclockwise. The crankpin 3311b continues to stop in the current state without revolving. Therefore, in the state where the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, even if the rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crankpin 3311b via the link member 3312, the crankpin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotating body 3311 rotates. The forearm unit 3350 does not rotate naturally.

  Then, the arm unit 3250 of this example moves the drive gear 3308 in an appropriate direction (in this example, the front face) by the forearm drive motor 3307 attached to the upper arm unit 3300 from the storage position where the forearm unit 3350 overlaps the upper arm unit 3300. When rotating in the counterclockwise direction as viewed), the rotation of the drive gear 3308 is transmitted to the drive gear portion 3311a via the driven gear 3309 and the transmission gear 3310, and the transmission rotator 3311 having the drive gear portion 3311a is transmitted. The crank pin 3311b provided on the transmission rotating body 3311 rotates and revolves at a predetermined radius around the axis of the transmission rotating body 3311. The base end side of the link member 3312 whose front end side is pivotally supported by the transmission pin 3351b of the forearm unit 3350 is pivotally supported by the crankpin 3311b. The pin 3351b revolves around the axis of the second rotation shaft 3351a, and the forearm unit 3350 rotates in a direction away from the upper arm unit 3300 (direction of the unfolded position, clockwise direction in front view). It becomes.

  As described above, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, the revolution position of the crank pin 3311b is the axis line connecting the center of the crank pin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b. Since the position is slightly revolved to one side (counterclockwise direction) with respect to the center, when the transmission rotating body 3311 is rotated clockwise by the forearm drive motor 3307, the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b The crank pin 3311b is pulled through the link member 3312 in the direction of the transmission rotating body 3311 until the axis line connecting the two passes through the center of the transmission rotating body 3311, and the forearm unit 3350 rotates in the second direction. It will rotate counterclockwise around the shaft 3351a. When the crank pin 3311b further rotates in the clockwise direction and the axis connecting the crank pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b moves downward from the center of the transmission rotating body 3311, the crank pin 3311b is linked to the link member 3312. Thus, the transmission pin 3351b is pushed away from the transmission rotator 3311, and the forearm unit 3350 is rotated in the clockwise direction around the second rotation shaft 3351a.

  In this example, the forearm unit 3350 can be rotated within a range of about 60 degrees in the clockwise direction from the storage position overlapping the upper arm unit 3300 in a front view.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the back-and-back movable production unit 3200 of this example, the sliding movement of the arm unit 3250 in the left-right direction, the rotation of the upper arm unit 3300, and the rotation of the forearm unit 3350 are independent of each other. Since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be simultaneously rotated, or the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be simultaneously rotated, the movement of various patterns can be performed. Can be made to do. Therefore, it is possible to make a more natural movement as a movable effect unit imitating the arm of a predetermined character, and to attract the player's interest strongly.

[2-11. Backward front movable production unit]
Next, the back-up front movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. FIG. 169 is a front perspective view of the front back movable movable effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 170 is a rear perspective view of the back front movable effect unit. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the front front movable effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded oblique view of the back front front movable effect unit and the rear view. Further, FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the front / back front movable effect unit.

  The front back movable effect unit 3400 is disposed on the front side of the back rear rear movable effect unit 3200 and is attached to the front surface of the back box 3001. This back-up front movable production unit 3400 includes a unit base 3401 attached to the front surface of the back box 3001, and a back-up front where the rotary shaft extends forward through the unit base 3401 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3401. Drive motor 3402, drive gear 3403 fixed to the rotation shaft of front back drive motor 3402 and disposed on the front side of unit base 3401, gear portion 3404a meshing with drive gear 3403, and rotation on the front of gear portion 3404a A drive rotating body 3404 having a crank pin 3404b extending forward from a position eccentric from the center and rotatably supported by the unit base 3401, and the crank pin 3404a of the driving rotating body 3404 slide in the left-right direction. The long hole-shaped first slit 3405a and the first slit 3405a are inserted in the positive direction. A pair of slide support shafts 3405b extending rearward from a position on the left side of the view and on the left side of the drive rotator 3404 and supported by the unit base 3401 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and disposed on the left side of the slide support shaft 3405b and in the horizontal direction A second slit 3405c having a long hole extending to the link member 3405 disposed on the front side of the drive rotating body 3404, and slidably inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 and extended backward. A transmission pin 3406a and a rotation shaft 3406b disposed at a position on the left side in front of the transmission pin 3406a and rotatably supported by the unit base 3401 are provided, and the side on which the rotation shaft 3406b and the transmission pin 3406a are disposed is based. The back that extends in the predetermined direction as the end and is shaped like a predetermined item And a before and ornamental body 3406, a.

  The unit base 3401 of the front front movable effect unit 3400 is configured such that the upper end extends in the left-right direction and the left side portion of the front view extends from the approximate center in the left-right direction at the upper end to the lower side. The pair of guide rollers 3262 of the arm unit 3250 in the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 can come into contact and roll in the left-right direction. In addition, the unit base 3401 is disposed on the left side of the motor mounting portion 3401a in the front view of the motor mounting portion 3401a and the motor mounting portion 3401a for mounting the rear upper front drive motor 3402 on the rear side of the left end in the rear view. An elongated vertical guide slit 3401b extending in the vertical direction into which the shaft 3405b is slidably inserted, and a rotating shaft 3406b of the front upper decorative body 3406 disposed on the left side of the vertical guide slit 3401b in front view are inserted. And a rotation guide slit 3401d penetrating in an arc shape around the axis of the shaft hole 3401c.

  Further, the unit base 3401 of the front back movable effect unit 3400 includes a locking piece 3401e that is arranged on the left side of the front view of the rotation guide slit 3401d and protrudes leftward. By disposing the lock pin 3315 of the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250 of the back / upper rear movable presentation unit 3200 on the upper side of the locking piece 3401e, it is possible to restrict the lock pin 3315 from moving downward. It is possible to lock the unit 3300 from rotating naturally.

  The link member 3405 of the front-back front movable effect unit 3400 has a long slit-shaped first slit 3405a that is formed to have substantially the same length as the revolution radius of the crankpin 3404b in the drive rotating body 3404. In the link member 3405, a pair of slide support shafts 3405 b that are separated in the vertical direction are arranged at positions that are substantially symmetrical with respect to the vertical axis about the axis of the first slit 3405 a that extends in the horizontal direction. Further, the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 is disposed at a position substantially coaxial with the axis of the first slit 3405a extending in the left-right direction.

  The link member 3405 is supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of slide support shafts 3405b into the vertical guide slit 3401b of the unit base 3401, and is inserted into the first slit 3405a. The crank pin 3404b of the driven rotating body 3404 revolves so as to be slid in the vertical direction. The pair of slide support shafts 3405b in the link member 3405 is slidably inserted into the vertical guide slit 3401b via guide bushes 3407 inserted on both front and rear sides with the unit base 3401 interposed therebetween. .

  The front front decorative body 3406 of the front front movable effect unit 3400 is configured to extend in a predetermined direction, and is inserted from the rear surface on the base end side to the shaft hole 3401c of the unit base 3401 via the bush 3408 so as to be rotatable. A rotating shaft 3406b extends. Further, when the back upper front decorative body 3406 is extended in the left-right direction so that the base end side is the right side when viewed from the front, the back upper front decorative body 3406 is inclined obliquely to the lower right (about 45 ° axis) with respect to the rotation shaft 3406b. The transmission pin 3406a inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 extends rearward from the position on the line).

  The back front decorative body 3406 extends rearward from a position opposite to the transmission pin 3406a with the rotation shaft 3406b interposed therebetween, and is a pair of guide pins disposed on the circumference centering on the rotation shaft 3406b. 3406c. The pair of guide pins 3406c of the front front decorative body 3406 is slidably inserted into the rotation guide slit 3401d of the unit base 3401 via the guide bush 3409, and the rotation axis 3406b is the center. As described above, when the back front decorative body 3406 is rotated, the back front front decorative body 3406 is prevented from shaking as much as possible and can be smoothly rotated on the same surface.

  Further, the back front decorative body 3406 includes a detection piece 3406d detected by a back front rotation position detection sensor 3410 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3401. The back front front decorative body 3406 is moved substantially in the left-right direction. At the extended position (storage position), the detection piece 3406d is detected by the back upper front rotation position detection sensor 3410.

  Next, the movement of the back front decorative body 3406 in the back front movable effect unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the back front decorative body 3406 is in a storage position extending in the left-right direction in a normal state. In this state (storage position state), the back front decorative body 3406 is located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and hidden behind the center accessory 2500 so that it is hardly visible from the player side.

  Further, when the back upper front decorative body 3406 is in a normal position (storage position), the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 is positioned at the lowest position (bottom dead center). In this state, a rotational moment is generated by the load on the back front decorative body 3406 to rotate the back front front decorative body 3406 in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 3406b when viewed from the front. Thus, a force is applied to raise the link member 3405 via the transmission pin 3406a. However, since the crank pin 3404b inserted into the first slit 3405a of the link member 3405 is located at the bottom dead center, the transmission rotating body 3404 does not rotate even if an upward force is applied to the crank pin 3404b. Instead, the back front decorative body 3406 keeps the state of the storage position against the rotational moment.

  When the back front decorative body 3406 is in the retracted position, the drive gear 3403 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction (in this example, counterclockwise in the front view) by the front front drive motor 3402. The drive rotator 3404 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3404a engaged with the crankshaft, and the crank pin 3404b is revolved in the clockwise direction from the position of the bottom dead center. When the crankpin 3404b revolves, the crankpin 3404b rises, and the link member 3405 also rises as the crankpin 3404b rises. When the link member 3405 is lifted, the transmission pin 3406a of the back upper front decorative body 3406 inserted into the second slit 3405c of the link member 3405 is lifted. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with the rotation shaft 3406b as the center.

  When the back front decorative body 3406 rotates counterclockwise, the front end side of the back front decorative body 3406 moves downward, and the front end side of the back front decorative body 3406 is the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It will be lowered to be visible from the player side. Then, when the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotator 3404 reaches the uppermost top dead center by the back front drive motor 3402, the rotation drive of the back front drive motor 3402 stops and the rise of the link member 3405 stops. At the same time, the rotation of the front back decorative body 3406 is also stopped.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 173 (b), when the crankpin 3404b is revolved to the top dead center, the back front decorative body 3406 is about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position. It is in a rotated state (standby position state).

  In the case where the back front decorative body 3406 is returned from the appearance position where the distal end side is located below the proximal end side to the storage position where the proximal end side and the distal end side are substantially at the same height. The link member 3405 can be lowered via the crank pin 3404b of the drive rotating body 3404 by rotating the back front drive unit 3402 in the direction opposite to the above. The decorative body 3406 can be rotated clockwise in front view around the rotation shaft 3406b and returned to the storage position.

[2-12. Relationship between the front-back movable production unit and the rear-upper movement production unit]
Next, the relationship between the back and front movable effect unit 3400 and the back and rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the back-up front movable effect unit and the back-up rear movable effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 175 shows the back-up front movable effect unit and the back-up rear movable effect unit following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows these relationships.

  As shown in FIG. 174 and the like, the relationship between the back-front movable movable effect unit 3400 and the rear-back movable movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 is as follows. The rear upper front decorative body 3406 of the back upper front movable effect unit 3400, the upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decorative body 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decorative body) of the rear upper rear movable effect unit 3200. 3352) are formed in substantially the same size. The upper arm unit 3300 (upper arm decorative body 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decorative body 3352) are in the storage position shown in FIG. 174 (a) in a normal state.

  Also, the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 and the rear upper rear effect unit 3200 are in the normal state (the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 are in the storage position, FIG. ))), The upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are almost hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406, and the back upper front decorative body positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are hidden from the rear side of 3406 and the center accessory 2500 so that the player side hardly sees them. Further, in this normal state, the lock pin 3315 of the forearm unit 3300 in the back rear movable effect unit 3200 abuts on the locking piece 3401e of the unit base 3401 in the back upper front effect unit 3400, and moves downward. Is regulated (locked).

  From this normal state, the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210 in the back-up / down movable effect unit 3200 is driven to slide the arm unit 3250 leftward in a front view, and the upper arm unit 3300 in the arm unit 3250. The lock pin 3315 is moved to a position on the left side of the locking piece 3401e of the unit base 3401 in the back front front movable effect unit 3400 (see FIG. 174 (b)). As a result, the lock pin 3315 can move downward, and the lock is released.

  Subsequently, the front back front drive motor 3402 of the back top front movable effect unit 3400 and the upper arm drive motor 3254 of the back top rear motion effect unit 3200 are driven simultaneously, so that the back top front decoration body 3406 and the upper arm decoration body 3304 ( And the forearm decorative body 3352) are rotated about 90 degrees in the counterclockwise direction in front view (see FIG. 174 (c)). In the state of FIG. 174 (c), the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the upper arm decorative body 3304 are both in a standby position (rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the storage position). Thus, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are almost hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406.

  With the upper back forebody 3406 and the forearm ornament 3304 rotated to the standby position, the upper arm drive motor 3254 rotates the upper arm ornament 3304 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the forearm drive motor 3307. The forearm decorative body 3352 is rotated in the clockwise direction (see FIG. 175 (d)). Accordingly, the base end side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 moves away from the back upper front decoration body 3406 in the left direction, and the front arm decoration body 3352 rotates from the state where it overlaps with the upper arm decoration body 3304 so that the distal end side moves away from the upper arm decoration body 3304. Then, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and a part of the forearm decorative body 3352 appear from the rear side of the back upper front decorative body 3406.

  In this state, when the arm unit 3250 is moved leftward in front view by the arm slide drive motor 3219 of the arm slide unit 3210, the front end side of the forearm unit 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 is It moves to the left side from the front upper decorative body 3406 and the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is in an appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e)).

  As described above, a high-impact movable effect is obtained by combining the front-upper front decorative body 3406 of the back-upper front movable effect unit 3400 with the upper-arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 of the back-upper rear movable effect unit 3200. It is possible to entertain the player. In addition to the above, the back upper movable decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 can be moved independently at various timings to perform various patterns of moving effects. Yes, you can get tired of it.

[2-13. Moveable directing unit behind the back]
Next, the back bottom back movable production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 176 to 184. FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the rear rear movable movable effect unit in the rear unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the rear lower rear movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-under-behind movable effect unit divided into the rear-under-behind decorative body unit and the lifting unit, etc., and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the decoration body unit and the raising / lowering unit etc., and was seen afterwards. Further, FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the rear back and rear decoration body unit of the rear back and rear movable production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back and bottom rear decoration body unit from the rear. It is a perspective view. Moreover, FIG. 182 is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back lower back decorative body unit. FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing a schematic configuration of the elevating unit in the rear-under-bottom movable effect unit. Furthermore, FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-downward movable rendering unit.

  The back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and in front of the back-inside movable effect unit 3100. This back-behind movable production unit 3500 includes a back-bottom post-decoration body unit 3510 having a decoration resembling a tiled roof, and the back-bottom back-decoration body unit 3510 ascending and descending in the vertical direction according to the gaming state. An elevating unit 3550 mounted in the interior 3001 and a back / rear decorative board 3501 mounted on the rear side of the back / rear decorative unit 3510 are provided. The back and back decorative board 3501 is provided with a plurality of LEDs that are turned on / off depending on the number of lottery results held by the start winning.

  The back bottom back decoration unit 3510 in the back back and rear movable effect unit 3500 is disposed below the first decorative body 3511 and a first decorative body 3511 that extends in the left-right direction and is shaped like a roof of a building. A horizontally long second decorative body 3512 formed in a shape simulating a wall of a building, and disposed on the front side of the second decorative body 3512, and formed in a shape simulating a building's windbreak, and from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right The rear back movable decorative body 3513 (the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R) and the back lower back movable decorative body 3513 that are separable are supported so as to be slidable in the left and right directions, and the second decorative body 3512 is provided on the front surface. Is mounted in a horizontal shape and has a shallow box-shaped unit cover 3514 that is open at the rear side, and the rear side of the unit cover 3514 is closed and the left and right ends 3554 of the elevating unit 3550 are closed at the left and right ends. A laterally long plate-shaped unit base 3515 attached to the right seat 3561, and a.

  The first decorative body 3511 of the back-under-back decorative body unit 3510 includes a plurality of hemispherical reserved number display portions 3511a arranged in the left-right direction at the upper end thereof, and the back-under-back rear arranged on the rear side. Light is emitted by LEDs for holding display provided on the decorative substrate 3501. The hold number display portion 3511a can display the hold number according to the number of lights.

  As shown in the drawing, the second decorative body 3512 of the back-bottom rear decorative body unit 3510 is formed with a horizontally long opening 3512a at the approximate center in the left-right direction. The unit cover 3514 of the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 further extends downward from the lower left side of a rectangular portion extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a motor mounting portion for mounting the back back rear opening / closing drive motor 3516. 3514a, and a long slit-like left slit 3514b and a right slit formed in a lower part of a rectangular portion extending in the left-right direction on the right side of the motor mounting portion 3514a and extending in the left-right direction and arranged in the left-right direction 3514c.

  The back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the left front surface of the unit cover 3514, passes through the unit cover 3514, and the rear back rear open / close drive motor 3516 has a rotating shaft extending rearward. A drive gear 3517 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 3516 and disposed between the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and a first transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 3517 and is rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515. 3518, a second transmission gear 3519 meshed with the first transmission gear 3518 and rotatably supported by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515, and meshed with the second transmission gear 3519 and rotatable by the unit cover 3514 and the unit base 3515. The left pinion gear 3520 supported by the And Ongia 3520 meshed with the left slider is slidably supported in the lateral direction by the unit cover 3514 has a left rack gear 3521a extending in the lateral direction 3521, and a.

  The left slider 3521 of the rear back decorative unit 3510 extends forward from the plate-like hanging piece 3521b extending downward from the right end of the left rack gear 3521a extending in the left-right direction and the lower end of the hanging piece 3521b. And a pair of mounting bosses 3521c that are disposed apart from each other in the left-right direction, pass through the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514, and are attached to the lower rear surface of the left movable body 3513L in the rear back movable decorative body 3513. Yes. The left slider 3521 can be slid left and right by inserting a pair of mounting bosses 3521c into the left slit 3514b of the unit cover 3514. The left slider 3521 is attached to the mounting boss 3521c of the left slider 3521. The left movable body 3513L is also slidable in the left-right direction.

  Further, the left slider 3521 is formed at the upper end of the hanging piece 3521b at an extension part 3521d extending in a bar shape in the opposite direction (right direction in front view) from the left rack gear 3521a, and the lower right part of the extension part 3521d. A right transmission rack gear 3521e extending in the left-right direction and a detection piece 3521f protruding forward from the left end of the extending portion 3521d are provided. Note that the left slider 3521 is urged rightward in a front view by a tension spring 3531.

  Further, the rear back decorative body unit 3510 meshes with the right transmission rack gear 3521e of the left slider 3521, and a right pinion gear 3522 rotatably supported by a unit cover 3514 and a unit base 3515, and a right pinion gear 3522 sandwiched between the right pinion gear 3522 and the right pinion gear 3522. A right slider 3523 which is disposed on the opposite side of the transmission rack gear 3521e and has a right rack gear 3523a extending in the left-right direction meshing with the right pinion gear 3522 and supported by the unit cover 3514 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction In addition.

  The right slider 3523 of the rear back decorative unit 3510 extends forward from the left front surface of the right rack gear 3523a extending in the left-right direction and is spaced apart in the left-right direction so as to open the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514. A pair of mounting bosses 3523b that pass through and are attached to the lower rear surface of the right movable body 3513R in the movable decorative body 3513 behind the back are provided. The right slider 3523 is slidable in the left-right direction by inserting a pair of mounting bosses 3523b into the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514, and is attached to the mounting boss 3523b of the right slider 3523. The right movable body 3513R is also slidable in the left-right direction.

  The pair of mounting bosses 3521c in the left slider 3521 and the pair of mounting bosses 3523b in the right slider 3523 are slidably supported with respect to the left slit 3514b and the right slit 3514c of the unit cover 3514 via the slide bush 3530, respectively. It has become so.

  Further, the rear back decorative unit 3510 is disposed between the second decorative body 3512 and the unit cover 3514 so that the front side faces through the opening 3512a of the second decorative body 3512 and has a light-transmitting plate shape. A guide lens member 3524 and a back-under-rear middle decorative substrate 3525 which is disposed on the rear side of the guide lens member 3524 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted are provided. The front side of the guide lens member 3524 facing the opening 3512a of the second decorative body 3512 can be seen from the player side when hidden behind the back bottom movable movable body 3513 when the back bottom back movable decorative body 3513 is closed. There is no such thing.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the guide lens member 3524 is provided with predetermined characters and decorations in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It can be decorated. In addition, an open / close position detection sensor for detecting a slide position of the left slider 3521 (back and back movable decorative body 3513) by detecting a detection piece 3521f of the left slider 3521 on the rear surface of the back bottom back middle decorative board 3525. 3526 is attached.

  Further, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is driven by an auxiliary member 3527 attached to the lower front surface of the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R in the back lower back movable decorative body 3513 and the rear side of the unit cover 3514. The light from the gear cover 3528 covering the rear surface of the gear 3517 and the decoration LED mounted on the front surface side of the back lower back decorative board 3501 is guided to the rear surface of the first decorative body 3511 to emit the entire first decorative body 3511. A light guide member 3529 for decoration.

  In the normal state (in the closed position), the back-under-bottom movable decoration unit 3510 in the back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 of the present example is, as shown in FIG. The movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in contact with each other, and the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R have a gust of wind. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are each provided with the magnet arrange | positioned in the mutually attracting direction, and when it mutually contacts, it is hard to leave | separate.

  In a normal state, the left rack gear 3521a and the right transmission rack gear 3521e of the left slider 3521 are meshed with the left pinion gear 3520 and the right pinion gear 3522 at a substantially left end position when viewed from the front. Further, the right rack gear 3523a of the right slider 3523 is meshed with the right pinion gear 3522 at a substantially right end position when viewed from the front.

  When the drive gear 3517 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction (in this example, a clockwise direction in the front view) by the rear back and rear opening / closing drive motor 3516 from this normal state, the first transmission gear 3518 and the second transmission gear 3519 are moved. Thus, the left pinion gear 3520 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the left rack gear 3521a meshed with the upper side of the left pinion gear 3520 moves the left slider 3521 to the left.

  When the left slider 3521 moves leftward in a front view, the right transmission rack gear 3521e provided at the right end of the left slider 3521 also moves leftward. It will turn counterclockwise in front view. Then, the right slider 3523 moves in the right direction by the right rack gear 3523a meshed below the right pinion gear 3522.

  Therefore, when the drive gear 3517 is rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise in front view) by the rear back and rear opening / closing drive motor 3516, the left slider 3521 moves to the left and the right slider 3523 moves to the right simultaneously. Therefore, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R attached to the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523 move in directions away from each other.

  When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R move in a direction away from each other, the rear back movable decorative body 3513 is separated from the center in the left-right direction, that is, the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are separated. By moving in a direction away from each other, the back and bottom movable decorative body 3513 operates to open, and the back side of the back and bottom back movable decorative body 3513 is located between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R. Thus, the front side of the guide lens member 3524 arranged in FIG.

  Then, when the left slider 3521 and the right slider 3523 reach the left moving end and the right moving end, respectively, the driving of the back and bottom rear opening / closing drive motor 3516 stops and the movement of the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R also stops. Thereafter, the movable decorative body 3513 is opened after the back (see FIG. 182 (b)).

  When the back-under-back movable decorative body 3513 is returned from the open position to the normal closed position, the back-under-bottom open / close drive motor 3516 is driven to rotate in the direction opposite to the above so that it can be moved to the left. The body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R can be moved toward each other, and can be returned to the normal state by moving until the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R come into contact with each other. It has become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 178, FIG. 179, FIG. 183, and the like, the elevating unit 3550 in the back-under-movable rendering unit 3500 includes a horizontally long plate-shaped unit main body base 3551 and a unit main body base 3551. The front and rear rack gears 3552 are mounted apart from each other in the left-right direction and extend in the up-down direction, and are disposed close to the left-side lift rack gear 3552 in front view and supported by the unit main body base 3551 and extend in the up-down direction. A rod-shaped lifting shaft 3553, a plate-shaped left pedestal 3554 supported by the lifting shaft 3553 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a box-shaped left gear box 3555 attached to the front surface of the left pedestal 3554 so as to extend forward. Attached to the left side surface of the left gear box 3555 when viewed from the front. Engage with the drive gear 3557, a rear back / up / down drive motor 3556 having a rotation shaft extending into the shaft 55, a drive gear 3557 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back / bottom rear lift drive motor 3556 and disposed in the left gear box 3555. A large-diameter gear 3558a, a transmission gear 3558 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3558a, has a small-diameter gear 3558b that is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter gear 3558a, and is rotatably supported by the left gear box 3555; A left pinion gear 3559 that meshes with a small-diameter gear 3558b of 3558 and meshes with a lifting rack gear 3552 disposed on the left side in a front view and rotatably supported by a left gear box 3555.

  In addition, the elevating unit 3550 in the back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 includes a guide support member 3560 that is attached to the front surface of the unit main body base 3551 adjacent to the right elevating rack gear 3552 in front view, and a guide support member. 3560, a right pedestal 3561 supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, a box-shaped right gear box 3562 attached to the front surface of the right pedestal 3561, and a guide support through the right gear box 3562. One end side (right end side in front view) is rotatably supported by the member 3560 and is slidable in the vertical direction, and the other end side (left end side in front view) is rotatably supported by the left gear box 3555 and left. A pinion gear 3559 is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable, and extends in the left-right direction. And a, a right pinion gear 3564 meshing with the lift rack gear 3552 on the right is integrally rotatably fixed within the right gearbox 3562 in the drive shaft 3563.

  Further, the elevating unit 3550 in the back and rear movable production unit 3500 has a shaft cover 3565 that is attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 at both left and right ends, and covers the drive shaft 3563, and is attached to the front of the left pedestal 3554 to drive the lamp. A relay board 3566 for relaying the connection between the board 3013 and the motor drive board 3015 and the back and bottom rear opening / closing drive drive motor 3516 of the back and bottom back decoration body unit 3510, the back and bottom back decoration board 3525, etc., and a unit body base 3551 A wiring holding member 3567 that is attached to the front left side of the left pedestal 3554 in front of the left pedestal 3554 and that can hold the wiring and that extends in the vertical direction, and is attached to the lower part of the wiring holding member 3567 and the rear back and bottom decoration unit 3510 Lift position detection sensor 3568 for detecting the lift position And referring to FIG. 184), and a. The lift position detection sensor 3568 can detect the lift position of the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 by detecting a detection piece 3555a (see FIG. 184) provided in the left gear box 3555. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the left pedestal 3554 of the lifting unit 3550 is supported by a plurality of rollers 3569 that are in contact with the lifting shaft 3553 so as to be vertically movable. Further, the lifting unit 3550 is attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 on the left and right ends of the unit base 3515 in the back lower back decorative body unit 3510, respectively.

  When the drive gear 3557 is rotationally driven in a predetermined direction by the back-and-bottom lift drive motor 3556, the lift unit 3550 rotates the left pinion gear 3559 via the transmission gear 3558 that meshes with the drive gear 3557, and at the same time the left pinion gear A right pinion gear 3564 arranged on the right side via a drive shaft 3563 constituting the rotation axis of 3559 also rotates in the same direction as the left pinion gear 3559. The left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564 rotate at the same time, so that the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3559 are engaged with the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively, and are fixed to the unit main body base 3551. The pinion gear 3564 moves up and down.

  In other words, by rotating and driving the back and forth rear elevation drive motor 3556, the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal are supported via the left gear box 3555 and the right gear box 3562 that rotatably support the left pinion gear 3559 and the right pinion gear 3564, respectively. 3561 moves in the vertical direction, and the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 attached to the left pedestal 3554 and the right pedestal 3561 can also be moved in the vertical direction.

  Next, a description will be given of the movement of the behind-the-bottom movable effect unit 3500. In the normal state, this back-under-back movable effect unit 3500 is in a state where the back-under-bottom post-decorative body unit 3510 is positioned below by the elevating unit 3550 and the back-under-bottom post-movable decoration body 3513 is closed ( Closed state) (see FIG. 184 (a)). In this normal state, a part of the first decorative body 3511 and the back-under-bottom movable decorative body 3513 in the back-under-bottom decorative body unit 3510 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500 ( (See FIG. 108 and the like).

  Then, from the normal state, the back / rear back elevation drive motor 3556 is rotationally driven to raise the back / rear back decorative unit 3510 from the lowered position to the raised position (see FIG. 184 (b)). As a result, the first decorative body 3511, the second decorative body 3512, and the back lower back movable decorative body 3513 of the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 are located above the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 and are from the player side. Fully visible.

  With the back-under-bottom post-decoration body unit 3510 moved to the raised position, the back-bottom post-back opening / closing drive motor 3516 moves the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the back-under-bottom post-decoration movable decoration body 3513 away from each other By doing so, the state is changed from the state of the closed position in contact with each other to the state of the open position separated from each other. When the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R are in the open position apart from each other, the front surface of the guide lens member 3524 disposed on the rear side between the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R is on the player side. (See FIG. 184 (c)). In this state, the guide lens member 3524 can be illuminated and illuminated by emitting light from the LED on the back, bottom, and back decorative board 3525 disposed on the rear side of the guide lens member 3524. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the person.

  In addition to the above-described movement, the back-under-bottom movable effect unit 3500 moves in the back-under back-decoration unit 3510 before the back-bottom back-decoration body unit 3510 is moved to the lifted position by the lift unit 3550. After the left movable body 3513L and the right movable body 3513R of the rear movable decorative body 3513 are changed from the closed position to the open position, the back lower back decorative body unit 3510 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. May be.

[2-14. Front-bottom front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the back-under-front movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the back-under-under-movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the front-under-bottom movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back-under-the-front movable effect unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back bottom front movable effect unit.

  The back-under-front movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060. From the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 Also, the player can see the player from the player's side through the transparent game panel 1200 at the lower position (see FIG. 109 and the like). As shown in the drawing, the back-front-front movable effect unit 3600 includes a back-bottom front left unit 3600L and a back-bottom front right unit 3600R that are respectively provided on both the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. The back bottom front left unit 3600L and the back bottom front right unit 3600R are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the left-right direction.

  The front-bottom front movable production unit 3600 (back-bottom front left unit 3600L and back-bottom front right unit 3600R) includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3601 that is attached to the front surface of the ball guiding unit 3060 and is open to the front. In the 3601 box, the back front first decorative body 3602 formed in a shape imitating a lantern disposed at a position near the center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100, and the gaming area 1100 in the back bottom front first decorative body 3602 A back front front second decorative body 3603 that is arranged on the opposite side (outside) with respect to the center in the left-right direction and imitates a lantern and is slightly smaller than the back bottom front first decorative body 3602, and a back bottom front second decoration The body 3603 is arranged on the opposite side (outer side) of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and imitates a lantern, and is more than the second decorative body 3603 in front of the back. And around small under-formed back before the third decorative body 3604, and a.

  The lower back front first decorative body 3062 of the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 extends rearward from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface and the rear from a position below the rotational shaft 3602a. And an operating shaft 3602b. The back lower front second decorative body 3063 includes a rotation shaft 3603a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface, and an operation shaft 3603b extending rearward from a position below the rotation shaft 3603a. I have. Further, the back lower front third decorative body 3604 includes a rotation shaft 3604a extending rearward from the vicinity of the upper end on the rear surface, and an operation shaft 3604b extending rearward from a position below the rotation shaft 3604a. I have. These back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are each attached with a weight near the lower end.

  The unit base 3601 of the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 has a first bearing portion for rotatably supporting the lower back front first decorative body 3602 by inserting the rotation shaft 3602a of the lower back front first decorative body 3602. 3601a, a first opening 3601b formed on the lower side of the first bearing portion 3601a and through which the operating shaft 3602b of the back front first decorative body 3602 can pass, and rotation of the back back front second decorative body 3603 A second bearing portion 3601c for rotatably supporting the back-under-front front third decorative body 3603 with the shaft 3603a inserted therein, and an operation of the back-under-front front second decorative body 3603 formed below the second bearing portion 3601c. A second opening 3601d through which the shaft 3603b can pass and a third shaft for rotatably supporting the back lower front third decorative body 3604 by inserting the rotation shaft 3604a of the back lower front third decorative body 3604. Bearing portion 36 It includes a 1e, a third opening 3601f the operation shaft below the back are formed on the lower side of the third bearing portion 3601e front third decorations 3604 3604B is can pass through the.

  The first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f of the unit base 3601 are circular with the shaft centers of the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e as the centers. In the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear part 3601f, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and Each operation shaft 3602b, 3603b, 3604b of the back bottom front third decorative body 3604 can move freely. Further, the unit base 3601 has a first opening 3601b, a second opening 3601d, and a third opening around the shaft centers of the first bearing 3601a, the second bearing 3601c, and the third bearing 3601e, respectively. Arc-shaped guide grooves 3601g formed on the lower front surface of the portion 3601f are provided.

  With respect to the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front front Respective rotation shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a of the three decorative bodies 3604 are inserted and supported so as to be rotatable via bushes 3605. Further, through the first bearing portion 3601a, the second bearing portion 3601c, and the third bearing portion 3601e of the unit base 3601, the back bottom front first decorative body 3602, the back bottom front second decorative body 3603, and the back bottom front third Each rotation shaft 3602a, 3603a, 3604a of the decorative body 3604 extends to the rear side of the unit base 3601. Further, through the first opening 3601b, the second opening 3601d, and the third rear portion 3601f of the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third Each operation shaft 3602b, 3603b, 3604b of the decorative body 3604 extends to the rear side of the unit base 3601.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 has one end side connected to each of the operating shafts 3602b, 3603b, 3604b of the lower back front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604. Each of them has a projection 3606a inserted into the corresponding guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601 on the other end side, and has a back lower front first decorative body 3602, a back lower front second decorative body 3603, And a rotation restricting member 3606 that is attached to the rear side of the back lower front third decorative body 3604, respectively. This rotation restricting member 3606 has a back lower front first decorative body 3602, a back lower front second decorative body 3603, and a back lower front third decorative body by a projection 3606a inserted into the guide groove 3601g of the unit base 3601. The rotation range can be regulated so that 3604 does not rotate beyond the range of the guide groove 3601g.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed on the rear side of the unit base 3601, and the rotation in the lower back front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 is performed. Crank pins 3607a, which are respectively mounted across the rear ends of the moving shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a and the operating shafts 3602b, 3603b, 3604b and extend rearward from positions different from the axis of the rotating shafts 3602a, 3603a, 3604a, A first crank member 3607 having 3608a and 3609a, a second crank member 3608, and a third crank member 3609 are provided. In this example, the crank pins 3607a and 3609a of the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609 are coaxial with the operating shafts 3602b and 3604b of the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604. The crank pin 3608a of the second crank member 3608 is disposed on the opposite side of the operating shaft 3603b of the front back second decorative body 3603 with the rotation shaft 3603a interposed therebetween. .

  Further, the front back movable movable effect unit 3600 is slidable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 are provided. Each includes a slider 3610 having a transmission portion 3610a inserted in a loosely fitted state, and a lower back front drive solenoid 3611 that drives the slider 3610 to move in the left-right direction. By sliding the slider 3610 in the left-right direction by the back-bottom front drive solenoid 3611, the cranks of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 inserted into the transmission portion 3610a of the slider 3610. The pins 3607a, 3608a, and 3609a are moved in the left-right direction to rotate the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 around the axis of the rotation shafts 3602a, 3603a, and 3604a. The back crank front first decorative body 3602, the back bottom front second decorative body 3603, and the back bottom front third decoration can be obtained by turning the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609. The body 3604 can be rotated.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed between the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, the third crank member 3609 and the slider 3610 and attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601. A plate-like slide that has an opening 3612a through which the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, and 3609 of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 can pass, and supports the slider 3610 in the left-right direction. A base 3612 and a unit cover 3613 that is attached to the rear side of the slide base 3612 and covers the rear side of the slider 3610 and the lower back front drive solenoid 3611 are provided.

  In addition, the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 is disposed between the unit base 3601 and the slide base 3612, is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3601, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. A substrate 3614 is provided. In this example, the unit base 3601, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 are formed so as to have translucency. The LED on the back lower front decorative board 3614 emits light appropriately, so that the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, the back lower front third decorative body 3604, and the like can be illuminated. It can be done.

  Next, the movement of the front back front movable effect unit 3600 will be described. As shown in FIG. 189 (a), the back-under-front movable drive unit 3600 is in a normal state (a state where power is not supplied to the back-under-front drive solenoid 3611). The coil spring (not shown) is in a state of being advanced (protruded) toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. Although not shown in detail, the second front decorative body 3603 is arranged behind the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604.

  In this normal state, when the lower back front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to move the plunger backward (moving away from the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction), the slider 3610 connected to the tip of the plunger is also the same as the plunger. It will slide a predetermined amount in the direction. When the slider 3610 slides, the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, and 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 inserted into the transmission portion 3610a of the slider 3610 are transferred to the transmission portion 3610a. Accordingly, the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 rotate about the axis of the rotation shaft 3602a, 3603a, 3604a. Will be.

  By the way, the crank pins 3607a, 3608a, 3609a of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 in the lower back front movable effect unit 3600 are the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609, respectively. Is disposed below the pivot shafts 3602a and 3604a, whereas the second crank member 3608 is disposed above the pivot shaft 3603a. Therefore, the slider 3610 causes the crank pins 3607a and 3608a to be disposed on the lower side. , 3609a is moved in the same direction, only the second crank member 3608 is rotated in the opposite direction to the first crank member 3607 and the third crank member 3609.

  Then, the lower back connected to the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609 by the rotation of the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609, respectively. The front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 rotate. That is, when the back-bottom front drive solenoid 3611 is driven to slide the slider 3610, the back-bottom front first decorative body 3602 and the back-bottom front third decorative body 3604 rotate in the same direction, and at the same time, the back-bottom front front The two decorative bodies 3603 are configured to rotate in the opposite direction to the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 (see FIG. 189 (b)).

  When the drive of the lower back front drive solenoid 3611 is released, the plunger of the lower back front drive solenoid 3611 is moved forward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown), and the slider 3610 is also moved to the normal position along with the movement of the plunger. It moves and rotates in the opposite direction to the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 via the first crank member 3607, the second crank member 3608, and the third crank member 3609. Thus, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 rotate in the opposite direction to the above and return to the normal state.

  Accordingly, the back bottom front first decorative body 3602, the back bottom front second decorative body 3603, and the back bottom front third decorative body 3604 can be rotated by the back bottom front drive solenoid 3611. By sliding the slider 3610 back and forth in the left-right direction by the drive solenoid 3611, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body are driven by the back lower front drive solenoid 3611. 3604 can be swung freely, and the player's interest can be attracted.

  In addition, the back lower front second decorative body 3603 disposed between the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 is the back lower front first decorative body 3602 and the back lower front third decorative body 3604. Since the decorative body 3604 rotates in the opposite direction, the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 360 are moved greatly with respect to the player. Thus, the movement of the back lower front first decorative body 3602, the back lower front second decorative body 3603, and the back lower front third decorative body 3604 can be enjoyed.

[2-15. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 190 to 194. FIG. 190 is a perspective view showing the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left movable effect unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 193 is an explanatory view showing the movement of one movable unit in the back left movable effect unit, and FIG. 194 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back left movable effect unit.

  The back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is arranged on the left side of the opening 3001c of the back box 3000 and in front of the back middle movable effect unit 3100. The back left movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the front side of the middle movable effect unit 3100 in the back box 3001 on the left side of the opening 3001c, and to the front surface of the unit base 3701 in the vertical direction. Three movable units 3710 (back upper left movable unit 3710A, rear left middle movable unit 3710B, back lower left movable unit 3710C), a plate that is disposed on the front side of the movable unit 3710 and attached to the unit base 3701 and has translucency. -Shaped decoration base 3702, a back left decorative board 3703 attached to the front side of the decoration base 3702 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front face, and covering the front surface of the back left decorative board 3703 and attached to the decoration base 3702, the rear side being open The left side of the box is a shallow box with translucency. A side decoration board 3705 mounted with a plurality of LEDs arranged along the side surface on the right side of the front view between the member 3704, the back left decoration member 3704 and the decoration base 3702, and capable of emitting light in the right direction; It has.

  The back left movable effect unit 3700 of this example can emit the LED on the back left decorative substrate 3703 to emit light in a planar shape. The back left decorative member 3704 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is not shown in detail, but is arranged behind the left area of the center accessory 2500 in a front view in the game area 1100. In addition, by light emitting the back left decorative member 3704 in a planar shape, the corresponding part of the decorative seal 1102 attached to the game panel 1200 (panel board 1210) that partitions the rear end of the game area 1100 is brightly decorated. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous by making the inside of the game area 1100 brighter.

  The unit base 3701 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 has three first shaft portions 3701a extending from the right end in the front view to the front and spaced apart in the vertical direction, and substantially the same as the first shaft portions 3701a. Three second shaft portions 3701b disposed at a height and extending forward from a position slightly to the right from the left end, and three solenoid mounting portions 3701c disposed at the upper right of each second shaft portion 3701b are provided. . Further, the unit base 3701 is provided with a mounting boss extending forward for mounting the decoration base 3702.

  The three movable units 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 are configured by substantially the same mechanism. The movable unit 3710 includes a back left drive solenoid 3711 that is attached to each of the three solenoid attachment portions 3701c of the unit base 3701 so that the plunger protrudes downward, and a connecting portion to which the tip of the plunger in the back left drive solenoid 3711 is connected. 3712a, a flange portion 3712b extending in the left-right direction with the connecting portion 3712a in the middle, and a shaft hole 3712c formed on the left end side in front view of the flange portion 3712b and into which the second shaft portion 3701b of the unit base 3701 is rotatably inserted. The shaft hole 3712c is formed at the opposite end of the flange 3712b and has a movable lever 3712 having a long hole-shaped engagement hole 3712d extending in the same direction as the flange 3712b, and the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712. An engagement pin 371 that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the engagement pin 371 a, a first flange 3713b extending rightward in front view from one end of the engagement pin 3713a, and a first shaft 3701a of the unit base 3701 formed on the right end of the first flange 3713b are rotatably inserted. An operating lever 3713 having a rotation hole 3713c and a second flange part 3713d extending longer than the first flange part 3713b on the upper side substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the first flange part 3713b extends from the rotation hole 3713c. It has.

  As shown in the figure, the movable lever 3712 of the movable unit 3710 has a connecting portion 3712a that is connected to the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 formed at a position close to the shaft hole 3712c on the base end side. The distance between the engagement hole 3712d on the distal end side and the connecting portion 3712a is longer than the distance to the connecting portion 3712a (in this example, 4 to 6 times longer). Thereby, the moving distance of the engagement hole 3712d in the movable lever 3712 is increased with respect to the advance / retreat distance of the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711.

  Further, the movable unit 3710 of the back left movable effect unit 3700 is rotatably supported at the tip of the second collar portion 3713d of the operating lever 3713, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714 provided with a three-dimensional decoration on the front side. The back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the second collar part 3713d are disposed between the second collar part 3713d and rotatably supported at a position substantially in the center in the longitudinal direction of the second collar part 3713d. The back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left which is disposed on the rear side of the back left second movable decorative body 3715 and is attached to the front surface of the second collar portion 3713d and has a three-dimensional decoration on the front surface side. A third movable decorative body 3716, and a rear left movable decorative board 3717 mounted on the rear side of the second flange 3713d on the rear side of the rear left third movable decorative body 3716 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing.

  In this example, the operating lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are formed to have translucency, respectively. The LED on the back left movable decorative board 3717 is caused to emit light so that the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 can be illuminated and decorated. It has become.

  Next, the movement of the back left movable effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the back left movable effect unit 3700 has a plunger of each back left drive solenoid 3711 projecting downward in three movable units 3710 arranged in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. The distal end side (engagement hole 3712d side) of the movable lever 3712 is positioned below the proximal end side (shaft hole 3712c side). The distal end side (engagement pin 3713a side) of the first flange 3713b of the operation lever 3713 is connected to the rotation hole 3713c (first shaft) via the engagement pin 3713a inserted into the engagement hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712. Part 3701a) is positioned below the rotation hole 3713c, and the second flange part 3713d extending upward from the rotation hole 3713c is positioned on the left side of the rotation hole 3713c in front view.

  Accordingly, in a normal state, the second flange 3713d of the operating lever 3713 is located on the left side of the rotation hole 3713c (first shaft portion 3701a). The first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are also located on the left side as a whole. Therefore, in the normal state, most of the back left first movable decoration body 3714, the back left second movable decoration body 3715, and the back left third movable decoration body 3716 are located on the left side of the right end of the unit base 3701. It is difficult to see from the person side (see FIG. 194 (a) and the like).

  When the back left drive solenoid 3711 is driven from this normal state and the plunger is moved upward, the movable lever 3712 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3712c as viewed from the front, and engages on the tip side. The hole 3712d rises and moves to a position higher than the shaft hole 3712c. When the engaging hole 3712d of the movable lever 3712 is raised, the engaging pin 3713a of the operating lever 3713 inserted into the engaging hole 3712d is also raised, and the entire operating lever 3713 is moved along with the raising of the engaging pin 3713a. It will rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the second collar 3713d of the operating lever 3713 moves to a position on the right side of the rotation hole 3713c, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714 supported by the second collar 3713d, the back left second The movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 also move to the right side (see FIG. 193 (b)).

  By driving the back left drive solenoid 3711, the operating lever 3713 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body. When 3716 moves to the right side, most of the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are positioned on the right side of the right end of the unit base, It appears on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and is clearly visible from the player side (see FIG. 194 (b)).

  When the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 are moved by the rotation of the operation lever 3713, the back left first movable decorative body 3714, Since an inertial force acts on the back left second movable decorative body 3715 and the back left third movable decorative body 3716, it is rotated by the inertial force applied to the operation lever 3713 when the rotation is started or when the rotation is stopped. The back left first movable decorative body 3714 and the back left second movable decorative body 3715 supported so as to be able to swing freely.

  When the back left drive solenoid 3711 stops driving (energization) with the back left first movable decorative body 3714, the back left second movable decorative body 3715, and the back left third movable decorative body 3716 appearing, The movable lever 3712 is rotated by gravity so that the tip side (engagement hole 3712d side) moves downward, and the plunger of the back left drive solenoid 3711 returns to the normal state protruding downward.

[2-16. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 139 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed piece 1902.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 195), and the like, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating this volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-brightness white LED as a backlight.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2127 and the detection signal from the second count sensor 2556 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the magnetic sensor attached to the gate sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3071, the count sensor 2128, and the back unit 3000. A detection signal from the detection sensor 3072 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid are connected via the panel relay board 3012. 2124 and the second attacker solenoid 2561, the main control I / O port 4100 b, the panel relay board 3012, the back and back decorative board 33501 and the function display board 1191 of the back and back movable effect unit 3500. 1st special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol storage display 1184, second special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display 1188, game Drive signal to status indicator 1183 and round indicator 1190 Output to or.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, the gate sensor 2402, the count sensor 2128, and the second count sensor 2556. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3071 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2401, so the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2402 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2103 and the second big prize opening 2552 are opened and the game balls frequently enter, so the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556 Detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2128 and the second count sensor 2556. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3071 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2104 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3071 uses a mechanical switch that has a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 169) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, and the launching control by the launching solenoid 654, and also sends the ball by the balling solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 195, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. And a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. The CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the board 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is, as shown in FIG. 195, a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid driving circuit 4120d that outputs a driving signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506 based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 195, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 195, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 3013 or the motor driving board 3015. Or game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4, and each decoration provided in the game board 4 Game board side drive light emission data composed of game board light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, gradation lighting signals, etc. to the color LEDs etc. of the board. Is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to each relay board 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, or the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 are output. Door side light emission data for the door side drive light emission data from the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port through the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to 194 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit. In addition to or, or output control signal for extracting the sound information from the sound ROM4140d (sound command) to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are transmitted to the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Via the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow, and is provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to each relay board 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the drive command and the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 send a lighting signal or a flashing signal via the peripheral relay terminal board 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. A lighting signal or blinking based on the game board side lighting / flashing command that is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in the door frame 5 A signal is output to each of the decorative boards 2153, 2310, 2311, 2541, 2610, 2611, 30622, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501, 3525, 3614, 3703, 3705, 3717, etc. provided on the game board 4. To do. The relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 and the like attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 send a drive signal based on the received movable body drive command to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. Output to the dial drive motor 414 provided in the game board 4, the drive motors 3161, 3181, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402, 3516, 3556, etc. provided in the game board 4, and the drive solenoids 2330, 2630, 3611, 3711, etc. To do.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via each relay board 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069 attached to the rear surface of 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and each relay board 3017, 3019, 3068, 3069, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 and the peripheral side relay terminal. The speaker of the main body frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through the plate 882, or via the relay boards 3017, 3019, 3068, and 3069 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From 821, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the low-frequency speaker 821. In addition, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 195, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like. Control is in progress. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel and the direction crossing the one direction sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2402 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number that is a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are determined in advance. ROM of main control board 4100 for normal symbol hold storage means 4202 temporarily stored according to the above condition, and normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result based on the normal random number stored in normal symbol hold storage means 4202 Normal symbol variation pattern selecting means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern 4206 and displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 by the normal symbol display control means 4206. When the random number (ordinary lottery result) is “normal hit”, the start opening solenoid 2121 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the normal symbol hold storage means 4202 is stored. And a normal symbol memory number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of normal symbol random numbers on the normal symbol memory display 1188 as a memory number.

  The normal symbol hold storage unit 4202 described above generates a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol display control unit 4206 displays the variation of the normal symbol. ) And the execution of the stored normal random number is suspended until the normal symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

  The main control board 4100 has a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first start port 2101. A first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number; a first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to a predetermined condition; Generated based on the first special lottery result based on the first special random number stored in the first special symbol storage unit 4214 and the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3022 by the start winning to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the changed random number is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. First special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 and the first special symbol display unit 1185 variably display the first special symbol based on the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216. First special symbol display control means 4218 and first special symbol memory number to be displayed on first special symbol memory display 1184 as the number of first special random numbers stored and stored in first special symbol reservation storage means 4214 Display control means 4220.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined second lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start port 2102. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number; a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition; Generated based on the second special lottery result based on the second special random number stored in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 and the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start port 2102 The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the changed random number is selected from a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. Second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 and second special symbol display unit 1186 variably displays the second special symbol based on the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected by second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226. Second special symbol display control means 4228 and second special symbol memory number display to display on the second special symbol memory display 1187 the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage means 4224 as the stored number Control means 4230.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228 are variably displayed. When the first special random number and the second special random number are triggered by the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2127, respectively. ) And the execution of the stored first special random number or second special random number is suspended until it becomes possible to display the variation of the special symbol.

  The main control board 4100 receives the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 for the start winnings 2101 and 2102. Priority reserved digesting means 4231 for executing (digesting) the second special random number in preference to the timing is provided, and the priority reserved digesting means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second start port 2102. The lottery result is preferentially executed (digested).

  The main control board 4100 also includes a first special random number (first special lottery result) and a second special random number (second special random number) stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224. Advantages of generating a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the special lottery result based on the special lottery result is “big hit” and generating a small hit gaming state when the special lottery result is “small hit” Based on an instruction from the gaming state generation means 4232 and the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232, the opening / closing member 2106 or the second opening / closing member 2553 for closing the grand prize opening 2103 or the second big prize opening 2552 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. And a special winning opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the driving of the attacker solenoid 2124 or the second attacker solenoid 2561. In this example, the special winning opening opening / closing drive control means 4234, for example, drives the attacker solenoid 2124 when the special lottery result is “big hit”, and drives the second attacker solenoid 2561 when the special lottery result is “small hit”. It comes to drive.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 includes a first special symbol variation pattern table and a second special lottery result according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the first special random number or the second special random number. A variation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the special symbol variation pattern table is further provided. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 changes to a variation pattern table (for example, a variation pattern table in a low probability non-short-time state or a variation pattern table in a high-probability time-short state) according to the gaming state.

  Furthermore, the main control board 4100 has a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the first special random number and the second special random number, the first special lottery result and the variable random number. Based on one special symbol variation pattern, the second special symbol variation pattern according to the second special lottery result and the random number, and the first special symbol memory, the second special symbol memory, etc. Command generating means 4238 for generating a command for use, and command transmitting means 4240 for transmitting the command generated by the command generating means 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started with a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the panel 1200. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 flows down from the left and right sides to the peripheral wall 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall 2503 of the center accessory 2500 lowers the center accessory 2500. You are directed to the left area. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters and passes through the gate portion 2401 of the gate member 2400 disposed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402, Therefore, the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result by the normal random number generation means 4200. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 1189 emits light in either red or green). . The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4204.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 are expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

  Note that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 may be changed according to the gaming state. Compared to the case where the time-short state is controlled, the fluctuation time may be changed to a short time or the expansion time may be changed to a long time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by replacing the table with a different table for each gaming state. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, an area where a game ball can flow down from the center in the left-right direction is provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, but the right side from the center extends along the outer periphery of the game area 1100. After entering the second game area 2551 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the arcuate passage extending downward, the shelf 2601a of the front right movable effect unit 2600 is moved from the first discharge port 2578. Are released to the upper right of the attacker unit 2100 below the stage 2510 in the gaming area 1100 and flow down in the gaming area 1100. As a result, in a normal gaming state, when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center object 2500 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate member 2400 or the warp entrance 2504. As the number decreases, the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable.

  Therefore, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 so that the game ball flows down the left side region from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to suppress the game operation such as driving and entertain the game by the operation of the original handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent the interest from deteriorating. Note that the second game area 2551 can be easily driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 simply by operating the handle device 500 to be driven strongly without adjusting the rotation amount of the handle device 500 as appropriate. When the second big prize opening 2552 is in the open state, it becomes easy to aim at the second big prize opening 2552, and the second big prize opening 2552 is surely received to entertain the player. Can be done.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is finalized, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2402 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol storage holding means 4202 and displayed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on a normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs to be lit is suggested by the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are memorized and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2402 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center role 2500 is moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2301a of the front left movable effect unit 2300. It is like that. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 arranged below the center bonus 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3071, the main control board 4100 pays out a payout control board 4110 based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is sent to the payout control board 4110 according to the payout command, and the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is controlled so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are placed on the upper plate 301. To be paid out.

  Note that a game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the second large winning opening 2552. In this case, the game area 1100 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 1232 (1151) to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 2104, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, the big winning port 2103, or the second large winning port 2552, the winning game ball The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side without being returned to the area 1100.

  On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 opened on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. Then, the game ball supplied onto the stage 2510 rolls on the stage 2510 in the left-right direction, and is mainly discharged forward from the guide surface 2511 and returned to the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, when a game ball that rolls on the stage 2410 enters the chance entrance 2514 that is opened to the rear side at the approximate center in the left-right direction, the game area 1100 is opened from the chance exit 2515 that is opened directly above the first start port 2101. The first start port 2101 is received with high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is paid out to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the big prize opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2510 are The first start port 2101 and the like are received with a high probability, and when the second start port 2102 and the grand prize winning port 2103 are acceptable, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be received when it is released from the stage 2510. Therefore, not only the first start port 2101 but also the second start port 2102 and the big prize opening 2103 can be expected to have an expectation regarding the acceptance of the game balls, thereby enhancing the interest.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, the second start port 2102 is closed as described above. When the pair of movable pieces 2105 expands for a predetermined time to be able to win, and when the winning becomes possible, when the game ball is received by the second start port 2102 and detected by the second start port sensor 2127, the main control is performed. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740 via the substrate 4100 or the like.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2127, the first start is started. At the port 2101, the first special random number generator 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number. At the second start port 2102, the second special random number generator 4222 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Is called. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode that suggests “big hit”, the attacker unit 2100 is in accordance with the mode that suggests “big hit”. A big hit gaming state occurs in which the opening / closing member 2106 or the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern, and during that time, a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening 2103 or the second big winning opening 2402. As a result, more game balls can be acquired. In addition, when one game ball wins the grand prize opening 2103 or the second big prize opening 2402, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740. .

  In addition, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 in a manner suggesting “small hit”, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 has a predetermined pattern. When a small hit gaming state that opens and closes occurs at this time, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 during that time, more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 2400. When the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 1186 or when the special symbol such as the big hit gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the start opening 2101, 2102 and the first start opening sensor 3022, the second start When it is detected by the mouth sensor 2127, the first special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3022 and the second start port sensor 2127 until the special symbol change display becomes possible. The second special random number is stored in the first special symbol hold storage means 4214 or the second special symbol hold storage means 4224, and the display thereof is put on hold. The number of special random numbers, and displays in the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. The second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold digesting unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. Are executed (digested). That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 is executed (digested) in preference to the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2101.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first starting port sensor 3022 and the second starting port sensor 2127 and the special random number of the second special random number are used in a predetermined jackpot determination table. , It is determined whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, and is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 when the first start port 2101 is started. The first symbol random number extracted on the basis of the detected signal and the second symbol random number extracted on the basis of the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 2127 by the start winning to the second start port 2102 and the symbol determination table By checking, “big hit” is either “10R big hit” or “15R big hit”, or “probable change short no hit” “probable variable hit”, “short time hit”, “probable change short time” Ri "and the like is adapted to also be determined.

  When the special lottery result based on the first special random number or the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 is “small hit” The main control board 4100 closes the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds; in this example, approximately 0.5 seconds). The opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, when the special lottery result based on the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 causes the advantageous game state generating means 4232 to open or close the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 or the second attacker. After the second opening / closing member 2553 of the unit 2550 is in an open state, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds for a long time opening, about 0.5 seconds similar to a small hit for a short time opening), or An opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that closes the opening / closing member 2106 when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103 when any of the winning conditions is satisfied. , And repeats a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds), 10 rounds for “10R big hit”, 15 rounds for “15R big hit”, respectively. , It adapted to generate a favorable jackpot gaming state to the player. After the predetermined number of rounds, for “big hit”, the big hit determination table is exchanged for one of the big hit determination table at the high probability and the big hit determination table at the low probability according to the gaming state determined by the design random number. It is like that.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102 and the third start port 2415 are used. In response to (depending on the special lottery result), in addition to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 being variably displayed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 also has a special random number ( The effect image according to the special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, each decoration is displayed in a state where a series of decorative symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols is displayed (for example, three columns of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the symbol sequence is started, and then it is sequentially stopped (in this example, it is stopped in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol), and finally all decorative symbol sequences are stopped. Then, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, after the plurality of decorative symbol sequences are variably displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. Since the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. We will pay attention to the decorative pattern.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 231). The variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control substrate 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. ing. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command, and the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be increased.

  In addition, in the peripheral control unit 4140, in addition to the control of the effect image, the drive motors 3161, 3181, 3219, 3254, 3307, 3402, provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are based on a command related to the lottery result. 3516, 3556 and drive solenoids 2330, 2630, 3611, 3711 are operated as appropriate, and the decorative boards 2153, 2310, 2311, 2541, 2610, 2611, 3062, 3125, 3305, 3353, 3501 provided on the game board 4 are provided. , 3525, 3614, 3703, 3705, 3717 are adapted to emit light appropriately, and the player can be entertained by a movable effect and a light effect.

[5. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 197 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first stores various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the power is turned on. When it is determined that there is, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is executed. If the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach by the variable random number used for the lottery process for a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the display, the decorative symbol variable display executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the special symbol variable display (Left decorative design and right decorative design are stopped in the same design and the middle decorative design is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative designs are all displayed in the same design. Reach random numbers used in lottery processing for determining whether or not to win, symbol random numbers used in lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the special random number ( One symbol random number, the second symbol random number), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such like, random numbers to be subjected (usually random) in accordance lottery processing operation triggered become per the Toraku of the movable piece 2105.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2101 is won for starting, the second starting port 2102 is won for starting. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter in which the random number range for updating the reach random number is different. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 197 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 197 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2402, the first start port sensor 3070, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning port sensor 3071, and the like are received. Entered. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above random numbers, the random number of the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random number (special random number, normal random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol and the normal symbol is updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes, as the process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable symbol variable display is stopped. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a winning win as an operation trigger of the movable piece 2105 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is configured so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2105 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (excluding a part of the 10R big hit gaming state). A lottery process is executed (so-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game state, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is shortened, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained. When a hit is made, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the movable piece 2105 and increasing the number of times the movable piece 2105 is opened.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in the predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit, 10R big hit) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. .

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first start port sensor 3070, the second start port sensor 2127, the count sensor 2128, the general winning port sensor 3071, etc. as the process of step S19. When the signals are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 1186 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a mounted on the payout control board 1186 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 so as to pay out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the start memory number as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is terminated when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3070. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). On the condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2127 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2102) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S40) is executed. In the jackpot control process, the results of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped are “15R (right) probability variable jackpot (specific 1)”, “10R. (Right) Profit variation jackpot (specific 2) "," 15R (right) rank up probability variation jackpot (specific 3) "When it comes to the mode suggesting the 15R or 10R jackpot game state, When 2552 is controlled to be open and “10R (left) probability variation big hit (specific 4)” or “15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit (specific 5)” is suggested, 15R or long open In response to the 10R big hit game state of the game, the winning prize opening 2103 is controlled to be in an open state, and when it becomes a mode that suggests “10R (left) latent probability change big hit (specific 6)”, a short release 10R big hit game State In response to execute a process of controlling the open state the special winning opening 2103.

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S36). If is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a mode that suggests "small hit", A process of controlling the big winning opening 2103 to the open state is executed in accordance with the small hit game state similar to the 10R big hit game state opened for a short time.

  If neither big hit execution flag nor small hit execution flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ On the condition that it is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol is suspended. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not “0” (step S37), the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is applied. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3070 is in an ON state and a game ball has entered the first start port 2101, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first obtains the counter value by the first special reservation number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of the first special symbol hold is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S42, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S44. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of the first special symbol hold is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S42 to S44, the first special symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S43. Whether or not, if the big hit is a big hit type, if the big hit or small hit is not, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the type type of the game effect to be executed After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as before the start of the variable display according to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2127 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S51, if it is determined that the second special symbol hold count is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing in step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reserved number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 4100a is used as the processing in step S54. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the second special symbol hold count is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S52 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination processing (steps S45 and S55). When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A) and the acquired random number, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, Whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made by comparing the variable random numbers, the type of the big hit if the big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 if the big hit or the small hit is not Or the type of game effect to be executed is specified (step S61).

  In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, a high probability flag indicating that high probability state control is being executed is set. If the high probability flag is not set, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the first special random number. By comparing with one special random number, it is specified whether or not it is a big hit. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3819-3918) is set in a later-described high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206A) and is the same randomness as the jackpot determination value compared with the first special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) with a low probability is set to a jackpot judgment table (see FIG. 206 (A)) at a low probability described later and is compared with the first special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a big hit, and "big hit 1-12" as the big hit as the pre-judgment information, not a big hit It can be classified into either “losing” or “reach 1 to 4”.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the first special random number is acquired in step S43 of the first start port passage process, the same randomness is obtained regardless of whether or not the high probability flag is set. It is also specified whether or not a small hit is made by comparing the small hit determination value set to a numerical value with the first special random number. These small hit determination values (3800-3818) at the time of high probability or low probability are set in a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206 (A)) at the time of high probability or low probability, which will be described later, and the first special random number. It is set to the same random number as the small hit determination value compared with. For this reason, by comparing the first special random number with the prior determination table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it is a small hit, and is classified as “big hit 12” including the small hit as the prior determination information. be able to.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when the second special random number is acquired in step S53 of the second start port passing process, a high probability flag indicating that the control in the high probability state is being executed. If it is set, it is determined whether it is a big hit by comparing the high probability jackpot judgment value with the second special random number. If the high probability flag is not set, the low probability jackpot judgment value is determined. Is compared with the second special random number to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred. This high-probability jackpot determination value (3819-3918) is the same as the jackpot determination value set in the high-probability jackpot determination table (see FIG. 206A) to be described later and compared with the second special random number. The jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) with a low probability is set to a jackpot judgment value (3909-3918) at a low probability, which will be described later, and is compared with the second special random number. The same random number is assumed. For this reason, by comparing the second special random number and the pre-judgment table in step S61, it is accurately specified whether or not it will be a big hit, and "big hit 1-12" as the big hit as the pre-judgment information, not a big hit It can be classified into either “losing” or “reach 1 to 4”.

  In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), if it is determined in step S61 that the first special random number is compared with the pre-determination table and a big hit is specified, a determination value indicating which big hit is to be made. And the first symbol random number are used to identify the type of jackpot. Specifically, the determination value (64-175) indicating that it is a big hit of the specific 1 is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) described later and is compared with the first symbol random number. Among them, the determination value (0-63) indicating that it is the same random number as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 1 big hit, and the specific 2-5 or non-specific big win is a symbol determination table (to be described later) 206 (C)) is set to the same random number as the determination value indicating the specific 2 to 5 or non-specific jackpot among the determination values to be compared with the first symbol random number, The determination value (176-199) indicating that it is a big hit is a specific big hit among the determination values that are set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) described later and are compared with the first symbol random number. It is the same random value as the judgment value indicating

  In addition, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), when it is determined that a big hit is made, a plurality of types of reach effects are obtained by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. Which of the reach effects is executed to determine the big hit. Specifically, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the specific 1 big hit is the same as the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29) indicating that the super-reach production (hereinafter, also referred to as weak SP reach) with a low jackpot expectation is performed is a random value of Random value that is the same as the judgment value indicating execution of super reach production with low jackpot expectation level, and specific super reach production of super reach production with high jackpot expectation level (hereinafter also referred to as strong SP reach) The determination value (30-216) indicating execution other than (also referred to as a specific strong SP reach) is other than a specific super reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination value (217) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation level. -240) is the same random value as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random number.

  Further, the determination value (0-4) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed in the specific 2-5 or non-specific big hit is the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (5-29), which is the same random number value and indicates that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed, is a super-reach effect having a low jackpot expectation level among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (30 to 216) indicating that the determination value (30-216) other than a specific super reach effect is executed is compared with the random number value, which is the same random value as the determination value indicating execution. The same random number value as the judgment value indicating that a super-reach production with a high degree of expectation of jackpots other than a specific super-reach production is performed, A determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super-reach effects having a high waiting level indicates that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The random number is the same as the judgment value.

  The determination value (0-89) indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed in the big hit of 6 is the same random value as the determination value indicating that the normal reach effect is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. The determination value (90-189) indicating that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed indicates that the super-reaching effect having a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed among the determination values compared with the variable random numbers. A determination value (190-216) indicating that a random value that is the same as the determination value and that is not a specific super reach effect among the super reach effects with a high expectation degree of jackpot is performed is a determination value that is compared with the variable random number. Out of a specific super reach production, it is the same random number as the judgment value indicating that a super reach production with a high jackpot expectation level is executed, and the jackpot expectation level Among the high super reach effects, a determination value (217-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed is a determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the determination values that are compared with the variable random numbers. The same random number is assumed.

  For this reason, in step S61, the first symbol random number is compared with the prior determination table, and the random number is compared with the prior determination table, so that the type of jackpot is accurately identified. "Big jackpot 1" which is a big hit of a specific 1 of the "big hit 2" which is a big hit of a specific 1 from a weak SP reach, "Big hit 3" which is a big hit of a specific 1 from a strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach , "Big hit 4" as specific 1 big hit from specific strong SP reach, "specific big 5" from normal reach, or "special hit 5" including non-specific big hit, specific 2-5 from non-specific SP reach "Big jackpot 6" including specific jackpots, specific 2-5 from strong SP reach other than specific strong SP reach or "big hit 7" including non-specific jackpots, specific strong SP price "Big jackpot 8", which includes specific 2-5 or non-specific jackpots from H, "Big jackpot 9" as specified jackpot from normal reach, "Big jackpot 10" as specified jackpot from weak SP reach, It can be classified into either “big hit 11”, which is a specific 6 big hit from strong SP reach other than a specific strong SP reach, or “big hit 12”, which is a specific 6 big hit from a specific strong SP reach.

  In the prior determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), if it is determined in step S61 that the second special random number is compared with the prior determination table and the big hit is specified, the determination value indicating which big hit is to be determined. And the second symbol random number are identified. Specifically, the determination value (64-199) indicating that it is a big hit of the specific 1 is set in a symbol determination table (see FIG. 206C) described later and is compared with the second symbol random number. Among them, the determination value (0-63) indicating that it is the same random number as the determination value indicating that it is a specific 1 big hit, and the specific 2-5 or non-specific big win is a symbol determination table (to be described later) Among the determination values that are set in FIG. 206 (C) and are compared with the second symbol random number, the determination value is the same as the determination value that indicates specific 2 to 5 or non-specific big hit. In addition, when comparing the second symbol random number and the preliminary determination table in step S61, as in the case of comparing the first symbol random number and the preliminary determination table described above, a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed. Is compared with the random number to determine which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed and which is a big hit. For this reason, in step S61, by comparing the second symbol random number and the advance determination table, and by comparing the variable random number and the advance determination table, the type of the big hit is specified accurately, It can be classified into any one of “1” to “12 jackpots”.

  In the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202 (A), the reach is displayed when it is specified that the loss occurs, and the high probability flag indicating that the control of the high probability state is executed is set. A time reduction flag that indicates whether or not to display the reach by comparing the reach determination value at the time of probability change indicating that to perform and the reach random number, and indicating that the control of the short time state (low probability short time state) is being executed. If it is set, it is determined whether or not the reach is displayed by comparing the reach determination value indicating that the reach is displayed and the reach random number, and the high probability flag or the time flag is not set. First, when indicating that the control in the normal state is being executed, it is specified whether or not the reach is displayed by comparing the reach determination value at the normal time indicating that the reach is displayed and the reach random number. The reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change is set to a reach determination table at the time of probability change (see FIG. 206B), which will be described later, and is the same random value as the reach determination value to be compared with the reach random number. The reach reach determination value (0-5) at the time is set to a reach determination table (see FIG. 206B) to be described later and is set to the same random number as the reach determination value compared with the reach random number. The reach determination value (0-6) at the time is set to a random number value that is the same as the reach determination value that is set in a normal reach determination table (see FIG. 206B) described later and is compared with the reach random number. . For this reason, by comparing the reach random number and the pre-determination table in step S61, it is accurately determined whether or not the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the big hit is not made. The information can be classified as either “losing” that does not display reach (execute the reach effect) or “reach 1 to 4” that displays reach (execute the reach effect).

  Note that the reach determination value (0-5) at the time reduction and the reach determination value (0-6) at the normal time include the same determination value (0) as the reach determination value (0) at the time of probability change. When the same reach determination value and the reach random number match, it is classified whether the reach is displayed (reach effect is executed) in any of the game states at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. Therefore, by comparing the reach random number and the prior determination table in step S61, it is specified whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 in any game state at the time of probability change, time reduction, or normal time. can do.

  202A, when a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a determination value indicating which reach effect is executed is compared with a variable random number. The mode classification of the game effect to be executed is specified. Specifically, the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that the normal reach effect is executed is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later, and the normal reach effect among the determination values compared with the variable random number. The determination value (164-222) indicating the execution of the super reach effect with a low jackpot expectation degree is a random value that is the same as the determination value indicating execution of the reach, and a reach variation pattern table (not shown) described later ) Is set to the same random value as the determination value indicating that the super-reach effect with a low jackpot expectation level is to be executed among the determination values to be compared with the variable random numbers, and the super-reach effect with a high jackpot expectation level is specified. A determination value (223-235) indicating that a non-super reach effect is executed is a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach described later. ) Is set to the same random number as the determination value indicating that a super-reaching effect having a high jackpot expectation level other than a specific super-reach effect is performed, and the jackpot expectation degree A determination value (236-240) indicating that a specific super reach effect is to be executed among the super reach effects having a high value is set in a change pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach, which will be described later, and compared with a variable random number. Among the values, the same random number as the determination value indicating that a specific super reach effect is executed. For this reason, by comparing the variable random number with the advance determination table in step S61, the mode type of the game effect to be executed is accurately specified, and “reach 1” for executing the normal reach effect as the advance determination information, the jackpot expectation degree “Reach 2” for low super-reach production, “Reach 3” for high-reach super-reach production (other than specific super-reach production), High-reach super-reach production (specific super reach production) ) Can be classified into any one of “reach 4”. Then, by comparing the reach random number and the advance determination table in step S61, the advance determination information can be classified into any one of “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

  As described above, as a result of the comparison between the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 202A and the acquired random numbers (special random numbers, design random numbers, reach random numbers, variable random numbers), whether or not the big hit or the small hit, In the case of a big hit, if it is not a big hit or a small hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or prior determination information such as a type type of a game effect to be executed is specified. As shown in FIG. 202 (B), the pre-determination information is classified into one of 17 types: “lost”, “big hit 1” to “big hit 12”, “reach 1” to “reach 4”.

  Then, in the production prior determination process (steps S45 and S55), the specified prior determination information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit, if it is a big hit, if it is not a big hit or a big hit or a small hit) The reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or the type of the game effect to be executed), and the acquired special random number type (either the first special random number or the second special random number) Then, a hold number (value of the hold number counter) stored in correspondence with the acquired special random number and a hold number command corresponding to the set number are set. For example, in the production pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the number of first special symbols held A first special symbol hold number command corresponding to (the value of the first special hold number counter) is set (step S62). Note that in the fourth digit of the number-of-holds command (for example, 620XH when the prior determination information regarding the first special symbol is “losing”), when the number of held = 1, X = 2 and the number of held = 2. Sometimes X = 3, X = 4 is assigned when the number of holds = 3, and X = 5 is assigned when the number of holds = 4. For this reason, when the hold number command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4010, the start opening (one of the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102) where the start winning is generated, the start In addition to the number of holds stored corresponding to the mouth, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated start winning is a big hit or a small hit, When it is not a small hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, or prior determination information such as a type type of a game effect to be executed is started to be displayed in accordance with the start winning. The peripheral control MPU 4140a previously mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 can be grasped.

  In this example, the same random number as the jackpot determination value in the prior determination table and the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table described later is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot determination value of the pre-judgment table includes only a part of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table, or a part or all of the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table is different from the jackpot determination value of the jackpot determination table. It may be configured to include a random number of numbers, and the degree of possibility of being a big hit in the effect pre-determination process may be determined.

  Specifically, a part of the big hit judgment value and the outlier judgment value (which may include the small hit judgment value) different from the big hit judgment value can be distinguished as a high probability random number group, and the high probability random number group A high probability random number determining means having a ratio of the jackpot determination value that can be discriminated as to the outlier determination value set higher than a ratio of the jackpot determination table in which the winning probability of the jackpot is determined, and random number acquisition Of the random numbers acquired by the means, the winning random number (first special random number, second special random number) is classified into either the above-mentioned loss determination value or the above jackpot determination value, and this is not executed. A value that belongs to the high probability random number group in which the winning random numbers used for the determination are mixed with the jackpot determination value and the outlier determination value while maintaining the state of It is provided with pseudo-probability advance determination means that makes it possible to execute an advance determination on the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the jackpot winning for each determination process that is put on hold by determining whether or not there is The above-described pseudo-probability advance determination means may determine in advance the degree of expectation related to the big win.

  In this way, by including a high probability random number determining means in which the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value are mixed, there is a risk that confidential information about the winning result of the jackpot judgment that is still on hold can be leaked While maintaining the conventional production structure that eliminates the above, regarding the degree of expectation (pseudo-winning probability) related to the winning of the jackpot according to the mixture ratio of the jackpot judgment value and the loss judgment value in the means with high probability random number determination The preceding determination can be executed. For example, prior to the execution of the jackpot determination (digestion of the determination process), the preceding determination that the winning random number used for the jackpot determination is a value belonging to the high probability random number group (special hit determination value) was not made. When the decision process based on the random number value (a value belonging to the low-probability random number group that is paired with the high-probability random number group) that is not the pre-determined special hit determination value is expected, It is determined that the degree (pseudo-winning probability) is lower than the expected value of the jackpot (winning probability) (pseudo-lowered winning probability).

  According to the preceding determination method for such a high probability random number group, when the specific determination process is put on hold, the jackpot determination is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). In addition, the expected degree (pseudo-winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display corresponding to the hold-up. Will come to be.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for a display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which, for example, a determination process of a mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped )
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation process that waits until the first special symbol variation display on the first special symbol indicator 1185 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol indicator 1185 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 197).

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 204, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first executes step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in each storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a high probability state shown in FIG. A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112). If the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 206A is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 206 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short time state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table for a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability non-short-time state, a high-probability short-time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, the ten types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and the nineteen types of first special random numbers are small. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit determination value indicating that the winning is won, and to match the loss determination values indicating that the 3890 types of first special random numbers are out of place. In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the low probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the low probability, similarly to the above-described pre-determination table, 10 types of second special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 3909 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that.

  In addition, in the jackpot determination table at the high probability, 100 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, as in the prior determination table. Match the big hit determination value, match the small hit determination value indicating that 19 types of first special random numbers have been won for the small hit, and 3800 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value. One special random number is associated with each. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is a low probability (normal state (low probability non-short time state) ) And time-short state (low probability time-short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, a small hit determination value is set in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. It is not done and you won't win a small hit. In the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 100 types of second special random numbers including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability are the same as the prior determination table. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won and match with the loss determination value indicating that the 3909 types of second special random numbers are out of place.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set and the process is ended (step S118). Comparison result between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process If it is determined that the off compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 206 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 206 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and the probability change used when the game state is a probability change (high probability state (high probability non-short time state, high probability short time state)). Time reach determination table, time reach reach determination table used when the game state is short (low probability time short state), and normal reach determination used when the game state is normal (normal state) And a table. Then, in the reach determination table at the time of probability change, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reached and 238 types of reach random numbers are not reached, as in the prior determination table. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match.

  Further, in the reach determination table at the time reduction, similarly to the above-described determination table, reach determination indicating that six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table at the time of probability change reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the reach determination value indicating that the reach and the 233 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach is increased in the short time (low probability short time state) than in the probability change (high probability state).

  Furthermore, in the normal reach determination table, as with the above-described pre-determination table, seven types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the probability determination time and short-time reach determination tables are reached. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the reach determination values coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the 232 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal time (normal state), the reach determination value indicating reach is higher than in the time of probability change (high probability state) and in the short time (low probability short time state).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119). A reach flag indicating that becomes a reach is set, and the process ends (step S120b).

  FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 207, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S121 and S124).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 4100a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 206 (C). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123).

  As shown in FIG. 206 (C), in the symbol determination table, similar to the prior determination table, each determination result (specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation jackpot, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit, non-specific 10R (left) (Usually big hit)) is stored in a form associated with a design random number (first design random number, second design random number). The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. The 15R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is controlled (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 is repeated 15 times (15 rounds)), and after the 15R big hit gaming state ends. 1. Specific 1 15R (right) probability variable big hit that is controlled to the high probability time-short state until it becomes big hit again. The 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is controlled (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)), and after the 10R big hit gaming state is finished. 2. Specific 2 10R (right) probability variable big hit that controls to the high probability short-time state until it becomes big hit again. The big hit gaming state is controlled as if the game was ended in the 10R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, but by continuing the big hit gaming state thereafter, a total of 15R big hit gaming state is obtained. 3. Control (rank up) so that after the end of the 15R big hit gaming state, control to the high probability short-time state until the big hit again, 3 specific 15R (right) rank up positive change big hit The 10R big hit game state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is controlled (the opening / closing pattern for opening and closing the open / close member 2106 is repeated 10 times (10 rounds)). 4. 10R (left) probability variation big hit to control to high probability short-time state 5. The big hit gaming state is controlled as if the game was ended in the 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, but the big hit gaming state is continued thereafter, so that the total 15R big hit gaming state is controlled. (Rank up) and after the 15R jackpot gaming state ends, control to the high probability short-time state until a big hit is again made. Controlling the 10R big hit game state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in such a manner that it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and controlling the high probability non-short state until the big hit again after the 10R big hit game state ends 6. A specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit that executes a game effect in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a high probability state. Control is made to a 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100, and after the 10R big hit gaming state is finished, a predetermined number of times (50 times) of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are displayed. It is determined to be one of the seven types of big hits of non-specific 10R (left) normal big hits that are controlled to the low probability short state until execution.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value allocation is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206 (C), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank-up probability variation big hit, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 6 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit, non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit are set. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, non The distribution of determination values is set for a specific 10R (left) normal big hit.

  Further, in this example, when the specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit, and the specific 3 15R (right) ranked up probability variation big hit, the second attacker unit 2550 The big hit gaming state is controlled so as to open and close the two opening / closing members 2553, while the specific 4 10R (left) probability change big hit, the specific 5 15R (left) rank up positive change big hit, and the specific 6 10R (left) latent probability change The big hit gaming state is controlled so as to open and close the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 when the big hit is a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit. Therefore, during the control of the big hit game state in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened / closed, the center accessory 2500 is arranged so that a large number of game balls win the second big prize opening 2552. The game ball must be fired (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side. On the other hand, during the control of the big hit game state in which the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and closed, the game ball is aimed at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls are won in the big prize opening 2103. Must be fired (so-called “left-handed”).

  As described above, during the control of the big hit game state in which the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and closed, a game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500. In the game area 1100 on the left side, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls A variety of movements are applied and it flows down. For this reason, even when a game ball is driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the big prize opening 2103 when the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, Not only the game balls that have not won the big winning opening 2103 are discharged to the outside through an out opening 1232 (1151) provided at the lower left and right center of the gaming area 1100.

  On the other hand, during the control of the big hit game state for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, a game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. In the second game area 2551 on the right side of 2500, no obstacle nail is implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1200. Further, due to the structure of the game board 4, when the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second big prize opening 2552 The second big prize opening 2552 is always won. For this reason, in the big hit gaming state in which the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is opened / closed, the game ball that has been struck into the second gaming area 2551 is wasted (discharged to the outside through the out port 1232 (1151)). ), And the game ball is more efficiently won in the second big prize opening 2552, compared to the big prize opening 2103 in the big hit gaming state in which the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and closed. You can digest the big hit gaming state.

  In this example, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the big hit gaming state with specific 1 to 5 and non-specific and specific 6 (time to open / close the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100) or The opening time of the second big prize opening 2552 (the time for controlling the opening of the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550) is varied. Specifically, in the case of specific 1-5 and non-specific big wins, a long open state in which the open time of the big prize opening 2103 or the second big prize opening 2552 per round is 30 seconds is set. In contrast to the control, when the specified 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit is made, the opening time of the big winning opening 2103 per round is set to 0.05 seconds which is extremely shorter than the long open state. Controlled to short open state. Even in the case of a small hit, the short winning state is controlled to a short open state in which the open time of the big winning opening 2103 per round in the small hit game state is 0.05 seconds. In this way, when the specific 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit is reached, the opening time of the large winning opening 2103 per round is too short, so the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 Even if the opening control is recognized, it is difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 2103. That is, during the control of the short hit state in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the game ball rarely wins the big winning opening 2103, and unlike in the control of the long open state, many game balls Can not be expected.

  Also, in this example, multiple types of effect modes are prepared according to the gaming state, and when the gaming state is switched with a big hit (including when the gaming state is not switched with a big hit) The production mode is also shifted. In this effect mode, dedicated game effects (reach effects, effects during a big hit game, etc.) are set for each effect mode, and when the effect mode shifts, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs liquid crystal display corresponding to each effect mode. The effect display by the background color of the device 1900 and the characters (including the decoration pattern) is executed, and the impression of the game changes in each effect mode. Specifically, when the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) is controlled, the normal mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to a blue background color) is set, and the high-probability short-time state (probability change). The mode is set to the probability changing middle mode (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to the red background color) while being controlled to the low-probability time-short state (time-short state). (In this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled to have a yellow background color), and the probability variation latency mode (when the high probability non-time-short state (probability variation state) or the low probability non-time-short state (normal state) is controlled) In this example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to a light blue background color. In this way, the player can determine which production mode is controlled by visually recognizing the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a predetermined mode (characters or characters corresponding to each effect mode may be used) so that the player can determine which effect mode is controlled. May be displayed.

  Then, in the normal mode corresponding to the low probability non-time-short state, the specific 1 15R (right) probability variable big hit, the specific 2 10R (right) positive probability big hit, the specific 3 15R (right) rank up positive variable big hit, the specific 4 When the 10R (left) probability change big hit is reached, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the mode is changed from the normal mode to the probability changing middle mode with the control to the high probability time-short state, and the non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit In this case, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the mode is changed from the normal time mode to the short time middle mode in accordance with the control to the low probability short time state, and it becomes a specific 6 10R (left) latent probability change big hit or small hit. In such a case, the mode is changed from the normal mode to the probability variation latent mode with the control to the high probability non-time short state after the end of the big hit gaming state or the low probability non time short state after the small hit gaming state. It is. Also, in the probability changing mode according to the high-probability short-time state, when a specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit, a specific 4 10R (left) probability big hit, and a specific 5 15R (left) rank-up probability big hit Continues the probability changing mode with the control to the high probability time-short state again after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, the low after the end of the big hit gaming state As the probability time-short state is controlled, the mode changes from the probability changing mode to the time-short / medium mode.

  In the above probability change mode, if a specific 4 10R (left) probability change big hit, a specific 5 15R (left) rank up positive change big hit, and a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit, until the start of the big hit gaming state However, it is difficult to determine whether or not to control to a high probability time-short state (probability change state) after the big hit gaming state, and the big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is started. As a game effect in the big hit game state that is executed until the game state is finished, a probability variation bonus effect is executed as to whether or not to control to a high probability time-short state after the big hit game state is finished. In this probability variation bonus effect, for example, the player operates the pressing operation unit 405 to produce an effect whether or not the hero character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 succeeds in judging the villain character multiple times (four times). ), When the specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and the specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, the hero character judges the villain character until a plurality of performances are executed. In particular, when the jackpot gaming state ends, the high probability time-short state is controlled, but in the case of a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot, the main character is a bad guy in all of the multiple performances. By failing to judge the character, the low probability time-short state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. In this way, in the probability variation bonus production, since the production of whether or not the hero character succeeds in judging the villain character is executed a plurality of times (four times), there is an opportunity for the hero character to succeed in judging the villain character. It is possible to increase the expectation that the high probability time-short state will be controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the above-described normal mode, when the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit and the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability big hit are hit, the 10R big hit gaming state or the 15R big hit by the start of the big hit gaming state It is difficult to determine which of the gaming states is controlled, and the big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 is started, but it is executed until the 10R big hit gaming state is finished. As a game effect during the jackpot gaming state, a rank-up effect is determined as to whether or not to continue control from the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state to the 15R jackpot gaming state. In this rank-up effect, for example, an effect of whether or not the object detection unit 2530 succeeds in destroying a predetermined number of enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 by detecting the movement of the player's hand. Executed, and if it is a specific 3 15R (right) rank-up probability variation big hit, by successfully destroying a predetermined number of enemy characters, the big hit gaming state is continuously controlled to the 15R big hit gaming state. In the case of a specific 2 10R (right) probability variable big hit, control is made to end the big hit gaming state in the 10R big hit gaming state by failing to destroy a predetermined number of enemy characters.

  Further, in the normal mode described above, when a specific 4 10R (left) probability variation big hit and a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit are made, after the 10R big hit gaming state ends by the start of the 10R big hit gaming state. It is difficult to determine whether or not to control to a high probability time-short state (probability change state), and the 10R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is started, but until the 10R big hit gaming state ends. As a game effect during the big hit gaming state executed at the time, a probabilistic challenge effect as to whether or not to control to the high probability time-short state after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state is executed. In the probability variation challenge effect, for example, an effect is performed as to whether or not the door can be successfully opened by rotating the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with an instruction displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. (Left) If it is a probable big hit, it is controlled to a high probability short-time state after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state by successfully opening the door, whereas it is a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit In the case of failure to open the door, the low probability time-short state is controlled after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state.

  Further, in the above-described normal time mode, when a specific 6R (left) latent probability variation big hit is achieved, the high probability non-time-short state is controlled until the big hit is reached again after the 10R big hit gaming state. In addition, in the case of a small hit, since the gaming state at the time of the small hit is continuously controlled after the end of the small hit gaming state, In this case, after the small hit gaming state set equal to the 10R big hit gaming state, the low probability non-time-short state is controlled. In this way, when the 10R (left) latency probability change big hit or small hit of the specific 6 is reached, the control is controlled to the non-time-short state both after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state or after the end of the small hit gaming state. However, as the effect mode that is executed after the end of the 10R big hit gaming state or after the end of the small hit gaming state, the probability variation latent mode in which it is difficult to determine whether the state is a high probability state is executed. In addition, the probability variation latency mode is set with two types of production modes, the probability variation latency A mode and the probability variation latency B mode, and is higher when entering the probability variation latency A mode than when entering the probability variation latency B mode. The degree of expectation that is a probability state is set to be high. In other words, when the 10R (left) latency probability variation big hit of 6 is specified when the low probability non-short-time state is controlled, the probability variation latency A mode and the probability variation latency B mode are larger than the case of the small hit. Among them, the probability of determining the probability variation latency A mode is increased.

  In the probability variation latent A mode described above, for example, the object detection means 2530 detects the movement of the player's hand, and by moving away the enemy characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 one after another, the ally character If it is a big hit, it will control the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit by succeeding in saving the ally's character. On the other hand, when it comes off, control is made so that the enemy characters are only rejected one after another, or the ally characters fail to be rescued. Further, in the probability variation latency B mode described above, for example, the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs an effect as to whether or not the ally character succeeds in capturing the enemy character. By succeeding in capturing the enemy character, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit, but when it is out, the ally character can not find the enemy character, Or, even if a friendly character finds an enemy character, control is performed so as to fail to capture the enemy character.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when a specific 1 15R (right) probability variation jackpot is determined, the first special symbol 15R (right) probability variation jackpot symbol is determined, and when a specific 2 10R (right) probability variation jackpot is determined. Is determined to be the 1R special symbol 10R (Right) probability variation jackpot design, and if it is determined to be a specific 3 15R (Right) rank increase probability variation jackpot, it is determined to be the first special symbol 15R (Right) rank increase probability variation jackpot If the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the specific 4 is determined, the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol is determined, and if the 10R (left) probability variation jackpot of the specific 6 is determined, the second The 10R (left) latent probability variation jackpot symbol of one special symbol is determined, and if it is determined to be a non-specific 10R (left) normal jackpot, it is determined to be a 15R normal jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S124). If the small hit flag is set, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped. If the small hitting flag is not set as the aspect of the first special symbol (step S126).

  After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the processing of step S127, these lottery results (indicating either the type of big hit, the small hit, the reach out of the reach, or the outage (stop symbol of the first special symbol) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the above-mentioned control method is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S128, the process is terminated. The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets a specific 1R 15R (right) probability change from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at which the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. When the big hit is specified, it is determined to be the 15R (right) probable big hit symbol (a combination of the same decorative symbols of “gold”), and at the time when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect) Display control of the determined stop symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. In this way, when the combination of the same decorative design of “gold” as the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops variably, it is a specific 1 15R (right) probability variation big hit from the stopped design of the decorative design, It is possible to determine that the acquisition of the 15R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 that has the largest number of rounds and is easy to win a game ball to the big winning opening 2103 is confirmed.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies a specific 10R (right) probable big hit out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. In this case, 10R (right) probability variation big hit symbol ("1", "3", "5", a combination of the same decorative symbols of the odd number of "7") is decided and 15R (right ) When a rank-up probability variation jackpot is specified, 15R (right) rank-up probability variation jackpot symbol ("1", "3", "5", "7" odd combination of the same decorative symbols. 10R (right) When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the liquid crystal display device 1900 controls display of the determined stop symbol. As described above, when the combination of the same odd number of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the decorative symbols are stopped. However, it is not possible to discriminate between the specific 2 10R (right) probability variation big hit and the specific 3 15R (right) rank up probability variation big hit, but the 15R big hit gaming state using the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 or the 10R big hit It can be determined that the high probability state is controlled after the gaming state is ended.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies a specific 10R (left) probable big hit out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. In this case, the 10R (left) probability change big hit symbol ("2", "4", even combination of the same decorative symbols of "6") is determined, and the 15R (left) rank up probability change of the big hit is specified. When a big hit is specified, it is determined to be a 15R (left) rank-up probability variation big hit symbol (a combination of an even number of the same decorative symbols of “2”, “4”, “6”. Common with 10R (left) probability variation big hit symbol) When a non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit is specified among the big hits, a combination of 10R (left) normal big hit symbols (even numbers of “2”, “4”, “6” and the same decorative symbols. (Left) Probability Ri symbol and determines common), and displays controls the determined stop symbols at the time lapse of the variation time specified from the variation pattern command (when the game effects termination) in the liquid crystal display device 1900. As described above, when the combination of the same decorative symbols of even numbers “2”, “4”, and “6” as the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped variably, the specified symbols are selected from the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols. Any one of 10R (left) probability variation big hit, specific 5 15R (left) rank up probability variation big hit, and non-specific 10R (left) normal big hit cannot be determined, and the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550 Until the effect result in the 10R big hit gaming state (or 15R big hit gaming state) using is derived, it is not possible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability state after the end of these big hit gaming states.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit of the specific 6 out of the big hits from the received judgment result notification command as a mode (stopped symbol) when the decoration symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are stopped. If specified, the 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit symbol (predetermined combination of decorative symbols out of symbols (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols of “357”), specifically “decorative symbol combination”) When the hit is specified, it is determined as a small hit symbol (a combination of predetermined decorative symbols out of symbols (split), common with 10R (left) latency probability variation big hit symbol) and specified from the variation pattern command. The liquid crystal display device 1900 performs display control of the determined stop symbol when the variable time elapses (when the game effect ends). As described above, when the combination of the decorative symbol “357” as the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, either the specific symbol 10R (left) latent probability variation big hit or small hit is selected from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The 10R jackpot gaming state (10R jackpot gaming state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball) using the second opening / closing member 2553 of the second attacker unit 2550, the liquid crystal even after the end. Since it is difficult to determine whether or not the display device 1400 is in a high probability state, it is impossible to determine whether or not to control to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as an aspect at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (stop symbol), if the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol with loss is included. (The combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs are the same.) If the outlier is specified, it is a detachable design that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step S141). If the small hit flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the small hit according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state When the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are not set, that is, when it is a normal loss (a failure where the reach effect is not executed), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the loss (Not shown) is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the effect control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a selects the variation pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 4100a.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, the type of reach effect to be executed is compared by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number, as in the above-described prior determination table. Is set to determine. Specifically, 164 types of variable random numbers coincide with a determination value (0-163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are any of the super reach effects with a low expectation degree of jackpot. Match with a determination value (164-222) indicating execution of, and match with a determination value (223-240) indicating that one of the 18 kinds of variable random numbers executes one of the super-reaching effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot As described above, the above random numbers are associated with each other. The super reach production has a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production, and when the super reach production is executed, the player's degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined in step S151 whether or not the counter value of the short time counter in which the short time state continuation number is set is “0”. To do. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the control of the time reduction state is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, At the time, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 209, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 211, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. As the processing, display control for causing the first special symbol display 641 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time reduction flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185) when the time reduction completion flag is set (step S183). As a result, the control in the low-probability short-time state is terminated and the control in the low-probability non-short-time state (normal state) is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set and the time-short flag is reset (step S189), and the first special symbol process flag is set to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When the process is updated so as to be transferred (step S190), this process is terminated. The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. The jackpot type (15R (right) per high probability short-time, 10R (right) per high-probability short-time, 15R (right) rank-up high-probability short-time 10R (left) per high probability short time, 15R (left) rank up per high probability short time per 10R (left) high probability non-short time per 10R (left) low probability per short time) . In step S187, the type of jackpot (15R (right) per high probability short-time, 10R (right) per high-probability short-time, 15R (right) rank-up high-probability short-time, 10R (left) high-probability short-time, 15R (left) Big hit start command (15R (right) high probability short time start command, 10R (right) high probability) per rank up high probability short time per 10R (left) high probability non-short time per 10R (left) low probability short time per) Short-time start command, 15R (right) rank up high probability short-time start command, 10R (left) high-probability short-time start command, 15R (left) rank-up high-probability short-time start command, 10R (left) high probability non-short-time Hit start command, 10R (left) low probability short start hit command). Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S191), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started (step S192). Then, the waiting time until the start of the small hit gaming state (the time for displaying to start the small hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S193). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S194), and the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. When updated to (step S190), this process is terminated. The small hitting start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. In step S195, the small hitting start command is set, so that the effect of the small hitting gaming state instructed by the small hitting start command is liquid crystal. It is executed by the display device 1900, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like.

[6. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 211, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the like based on a command received from the main control board 4100 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 212 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second fluctuation pattern setting process)). Control processing related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to the speakers 130, 222, and 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3013 is executed. In the random number update process in step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

[7. Melody reach]
Next, the winning type notification executed during the variable display will be described. In this example, the game state (effect mode) executed after the jackpot gaming state is executed based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variation display during execution is output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. during the variation display. It is suggested by the voice mode. This will be described in detail below.

  As described above, during the high-probability time-short state, the shift control to the probability changing mode is performed. Then, when controlled in this probability changing mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the background color of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to be red, and continuously outputs a predetermined special voice mode. Therefore, the player can grasp that the high-probability time-short state is controlled by determining whether or not the special voice mode is output.

  In this example, the variation pattern for executing “Melody Reach” (for example, “Melody Reach Probability Big Hit”, which executes “Melody Reach”, and “Melody Reach” executes “Melody Reach”, and “Melody Reach” executes “Melody Reach” as a latent probability change big hit. This is executed when a “Leach latency probability change big hit”, “Melody reach” is executed, and “Melody reach normal big hit”, “Melody reach” is executed, and “Melody reach is lost” is received. A voice mode similar to the special voice mode intermittently output during the high probability time-short state (probability changing mode) control (for example, a part of the special voice mode (for example, the first half) Or No. 1 etc.) or may be completely the same as the special voice mode) Compared to the case where a big hit is made by executing a fluctuation display based on a fluctuation pattern other than “Melody Reach”, the transition control to the high probability time-short state (probability changing mode) is performed at a higher rate after the big hit gaming state ends. ”Is executed and the ratio of control to the high probability time-short state (probability changing mode) is controlled to another gaming state (effect mode other than the probability changing mode) after the big hit gaming state ends. Notify that the rate is higher.

  Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) After the big hit game state is finished, the probability change big hit that controls to the high probability short-time state (for example, 15R (right) positive change big hit, 10R (right) positive change big hit, 15R (right) rank up positive change big hit, 10R (left) positive change big hit, 15R (left ) If the rank-up probability variation big hit is determined, it will be a big hit (for example, 10R (left) latency probability variable big hit, 10R (left) normal big hit) which is controlled to a gaming state other than the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state ends. Compared to the case, execute “melody reach” in the above variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing). Ratio the change pattern setting process to be higher for determining the dynamic pattern (first shift pattern setting process (step S82), the second change pattern setting process) constitutes a variation pattern table used in. In this way, the player can output a voice mode similar to the special voice mode that is output in the high-probability short-time state (probability changing mode) when the specific variation display is executed, so that the player can Mode) easily, and the expectation for the high probability short-time state (probability change mode) is improved.

  The special voice mode is composed of “intro”, “A melody”, and “rust”. When a variation pattern for executing “melody reach” is received, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. The above-mentioned “intro” is output at the time of starting, and the right decorative symbol that is variably displayed at the timing when the “intro” is terminated is stopped and displayed at the same symbol as the left decorative symbol to generate reach. Then, the above “A melody” is output when the “melody reach” reach production is started, and usually the medium decoration symbol that is variably displayed at the timing of ending the “A melody” is stopped and displayed, and the display result is derived and displayed. .

  On the other hand, when executing a reach development effect that has a higher percentage of big hits than the executed reach production, that is, executing a “melody development reach” that has a higher percentage of big hits than the variation pattern that executes “melody reach” When the variation pattern to be received is received, “A melody” is terminated at the timing of ending the reach effect as shown in FIG. 213, and “rust” is output when the reach development effect is started. Then, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the “rust” is finished, and the display result is derived and displayed. When a variation pattern for executing “Melody Development Reach” is received, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (slowly changes up and down and is not completely stopped) in synchronization with the end of “A melody”. Thus, the medium decorative symbol may be displayed again and again at the timing of starting the output of “rust”.

  As described above, in this example, the larger the number of the configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes including the plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the ratio of the big hit ("Melody reach" has a higher percentage of big hits (expectation for big hits) than "Melody reach"). More specifically, the melody development expectation of “Melody Reach” jackpot expectation {(appearance rate of “per melody reach”) / (appearance rate of “out of melody reach” + appearance rate of “per melody reach”)} The above fluctuation so that the expectation of big hit of “reach” {(appearance rate of “per melody development reach”) / (appearance rate of “out of melody development reach” + appearance rate of “per melody development reach”)} is higher A variation pattern table used in pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing (step S82), second variation pattern setting processing) is configured. Therefore, the expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high probability short-time state can be improved as the configuration of the special display mode is switched.

  Further, in this example, when a big hit is made in the variable display in which “melody reach” is executed, the transition control to the high probability short-time state is always performed after the big hit gaming state is finished. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) The melody reach is executed by the above variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) only when the probability variation big hit that controls to the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state is determined. In the case of a big hit that is controlled to a gaming state other than the high-probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state ends, the fluctuation pattern for executing “melody reach” is not decided. Therefore, when “melody reach” is executed, the expectation for the high-probability time-short state can be improved and attention can be paid to the variable display during execution.

  In addition, even when the big display is a big hit in the variability display in which “melody reach” is performed, after the big hit gaming state, the transition control to a gaming state other than the high probability short-time state may be performed. In this case, the “melody reach” It is configured so that the rate of transition control to the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state is higher than when the big hit in the variable display executed by other reach when the big display is a big hit. May be. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit in the jackpot determination process (step S81), and the special symbol stop symbol setting process (first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), second special symbol stop symbol setting process) `` Melody Reach '' is not only for the case where the probability is changed to a high probability short-time control after the big hit gaming state, but also when the big hit is controlled to a gaming state other than the high probability short-time state after the big hit gaming state. `` Melody reach reach '' at a higher rate than `` Melody reach ''. In the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process (step S82), second variation pattern setting process) to be selected It may constitute a variation pattern table use.

  Further, in this case, the larger the number of configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes consisting of a plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the bigger the hit. In some cases, the ratio of controlling to the high probability short time state after the big hit gaming state may be increased. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state ends, the above variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting) is performed so that “melody development reach” is selected at a higher rate than “melody reach”. You may comprise the fluctuation pattern table used by a process (step S82) and a 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process. Thereby, the expectation for the high-probability short-time state can be improved as the special display mode is switched.

  Furthermore, in this example, “melody reach” that outputs the same voice mode as the special voice mode that is output in the high-probability time-short state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the low-probability non-time-short state (normal mode) A voice mode that is output in a low-probability non-short-time state (normal mode) when the “normal melody reach” is executed during the variable display and a big hit is made by executing the same voice mode as that output in Low probability after the big hit gaming state at a higher rate (including those controlled to the low probability non-time-short state (normal mode)) at a higher rate than when the other hits that do not output during the fluctuation display is executed Execute “Time-Short Melody Reach” that outputs the same voice mode that is controlled in the non-time-short state (normal mode) and the voice mode that is output in the low-probability time-short state (time-short mode) during the variable display. When a big hit is made, the voice mode that is output in the low-probability time-short state (time-short-medium mode) is higher than when the big hit is made by executing another reach that does not output during fluctuation display (be sure to be in the low-probability short-time state) (Including things controlled in the time-short / medium mode)), and those that control to the low-probability time-short state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the sound modes similar to the sound mode output in the high-probability non-time-short state (probability variation latency mode) Execute the “latent melody reach” that is output during fluctuation display and execute other reach that does not output the voice mode that is output in the high probability non-time-short state (probability variation latent mode) when the big hit is made It is possible to execute something that is controlled to a high probability non-short-time state (probability variation latency mode) at the end of the big-hit gaming state at a higher rate (including those that are controlled to a high probability non-time-short state). It may be the one.

  In the high-probability non-time-short state and the low-probability non-time-short state, control is made to the probability-variation latent mode in a mode (so-called latent probability change) in which it is difficult to determine whether the control is in the high-probability non-time-short state or the low-probability non-time-short state. There is a case. In this case, a higher rate than when a big hit is made by executing another reach that does not output during the variable display of the voice mode output in the probability variation latent mode when “latent melody reach” is executed and a big hit is achieved ( It is output in the normal mode when it is controlled to the high probability non-time-short state after the big hit gaming state is finished or the “normal melody reach” is executed and the big hit is achieved. High probability non-short time after the big hit gaming state at a higher rate (including those controlled to low probability non-time short state) at a higher rate (including those controlled to low probability non-time short state) (For example, when the latent probability variation big hit is controlled to a high probability non-time-short state after the big hit gaming state ends, the normal big hit is controlled to the low probability non-time short state after the big hit gaming state ends. Execute `` latent melody reach '' at a higher rate than usual, or control to a low probability non-time short state after the big hit gaming state ends. The “normal melody reach” may be carried out at a higher rate than when As a result, when a big hit is made with "Hidden Melody Reach", it is controlled to a probabilistic latent mode where it is difficult to determine whether it is controlled to a high probability non-time short state or a low probability non-time short state after the big hit gaming state. However, it is possible to recognize that the state is a high probability non-time-short state or a high probability of being controlled to the high probability non-time-short state, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be improved. In addition, when “Hidden Melody Reach” is executed, it is highly likely that the player is in a high probability non-time-short state after the jackpot gaming state ends or is controlled to a high probability non-time-short state. Hopefully, the game entertainment will improve.

  Further, in this case, the larger the number of configuration modes output in the variable display among the special audio modes consisting of a plurality of configuration modes of “Intro”, “A melody”, and “Crust”, the bigger the hit. In some cases, the ratio of controlling to the high probability non-short-time state after the big hit gaming state may be increased. Specifically, in the case of controlling to the high probability non-short-time state after the big hit gaming state, the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern) is selected so that “melody development reach” is selected at a higher rate than “melody reach”. You may comprise the fluctuation pattern table used by a setting process (step S82) and a 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process. Special display mode that is switched during variable display that is a big hit even if it is controlled to the probability variation latent mode where it is difficult to determine whether it is controlled to high probability non-time short state or low probability non-time short state by this It can be recognized that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a high probability non-time-short state, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be improved.

  Also, in this example, the configuration mode switching time and the production switching time (the occurrence of reach, the end of the reach production (stop display of the medium decoration symbol if the reach development production is not executed), the end of the reach development production (medium decoration design) The display of the special voice mode can be easily recognized by the player, such as switching of effects, occurrence of reach, and derivation display of display results. Since the mode and the content of the production are made to correspond one-to-one, the player can grasp the content of the production from the configuration mode of the special voice mode that is output without viewing the content displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible (for example, when “A melody” is output, it is possible to grasp that the reach effect is being executed).

  In this way, in this example, even if the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not visually recognized, it is suggested that the mode is controlled to the probability changing mode after the big hit gaming state by naturally changing the sound mode that comes in from the ear. Therefore, not only the player who is visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device 1900 but also the player who has diverted his / her line of sight from the liquid crystal display device 1900 can surely recognize that the “melody reach” variable display is being executed. For example, it is possible to prevent a problem of oversight that occurs when some information is suggested by display contents such as displaying a character or the like on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, by recognizing that a player who has diverted his / her line of sight from the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executing “melody reach”, attention is paid to the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with expectation for the big hit gaming state. Can do.

  In this example, the special voice mode composed of the plurality of configuration modes is used, but a special voice mode consisting of one configuration mode may be used. In this case, it may be configured such that the longer the output period of the special sound mode is, the higher the percentage of jackpots is, and the output of the special sound mode is terminated and restarted in synchronization with the changeover timing of the effect. May be.

  In the above-described example, the game state after the big hit gaming state is suggested by the voice type that is output during the variable display, but the period for outputting the voice mode that suggests the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. The time period and time are not limited to those described above. A part of the variable display (for example, from the start of the variable display to the generation of reach, any one of the reach production, the reach development production, or any A plurality of combinations) may be executed.

  Also, if the result of this variable display is a big hit, it is not limited to suggesting the gaming state after the big hit gaming state, but if the result of the variable display executed after the next is a big hit, You may make it suggest the game state by which transfer control is performed after a state completion. More specifically, when it is determined that the probable big hit that is controlled to a high-probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state is finished in the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55) executed when the start win is generated, the change display based on the start win is displayed. Start winning prize that was determined to be a promising big hit in the production pre-determination process after executing the melody reach for a single variability display before the start or multiple varieties of variability display. In the variable display based on the above, a variable display that is a big hit may be executed in a mode other than “melody reach” or “melody reach”. In addition, when it is determined that a big hit other than a probable big hit that is controlled to a high-probability time-short state after the big hit gaming state is finished in the effect pre-determination process (steps S45 and S55), the start is also performed at a predetermined rate. You may make it perform the fluctuation | variation display which performs "melody reach" in the fluctuation | variation display before starting the fluctuation | variation display based on a prize, and runs off. Also, in this case, the rate at which “melody reach” is executed in the variable display based on the start prize is lower than the rate at which “melody reach” is executed in the variable display based on the start prize determined to be a probable big hit. By configuring, when a big hit is made when “Melody Reach” is executed, the rate of shifting control to the probability changing mode after the big hit gaming state can be made higher than the rate of shifting control to another effect mode .

  Further, in the above example, an object indicating the game state (effect mode) after the end of the big hit game state is shown by the sound mode output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. during the variable display, but a specific effect mode ( For example, a mode similar to a mode (for example, a specific mode) executed by a rendering unit other than the liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, at least one of a unit for performing a rendering such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp / LED, etc.) A part of the mode executed during the production mode (for example, the first half or the like may be completely the same as the mode executed during the specific production mode) is executed during the variable display. Anything to do. When the game state (effect mode) after the big hit game state is suggested by the light emission mode of the lamp / LED (for example, light emission color or flashing pattern; special light emission mode) or the movable mode of the movable body (for example, a specific performance) Even when the game state (effect mode) after the big hit game state is suggested by a movable body that moves only during the mode (special movable mode), the variable display related to the specific effect mode is executed. Can be easily recognized by the player.

  In addition, as described above, in this example, during the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state), the effect that emphasizes the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state) (in this example, the special voice mode is intermittent (repeated). Is output). In this way, the effect executed during the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) is imprinted on the player's mind, and this effect and the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state) are strongly associated with each other and stored. When an effect executed during (high probability time-short state) is executed, the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state) can be immediately recalled. In addition, in this example, the special voice mode is output intermittently (repeatedly) as an effect emphasizing that it is in the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state). It only needs to execute an effect that emphasizes the fact that it is in the short-time state. For example, the lamp / LED light emission mode (for example, emission color or blinking pattern), the movable mode of the movable body (for example, movable only during the high-probability time-short state) Any one of the sound modes (special sound modes) of the speaker, etc., or any combination (all may be executed).

  In addition, in the case of suggesting by the planar display mode of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is difficult for the player to notice that it is suggested that the display content is not watched, but the player naturally enters the ear as in this example. Liquid crystal display depending on the mode of movement of the movable body that is easy to notice the movement if it is in the field of view by physically operating the three-dimensional shaped object that comes in, the light emission mode of the lamp and LED that naturally enters the eye Even if the display content of the device 1900 is not closely watched, the player feels uncomfortable and is controlled to be different from the normal mode. As a result, it is controlled to the same mode as that executed during a specific performance mode. You can easily notice that you are.

  In other words, even for a player who plays a game on the gaming machine for the first time or a player who does not know the contents of the rendering of the gaming machine, the transition control to the high probability state is performed and the probability changing mode is controlled. The voice mode output in an advantageous state can be informed by listening to the voice mode output from the gaming machine that has output a lot of prize balls by outputting a different voice mode. And if the same voice mode as that output in the above-mentioned advantageous state is also output from the gaming machine in which the player is playing, will the gaming machine be in an advantageous state? Can be expected. In addition, since the player does not always keep watching the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player may miss the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, paying attention to whether or not the game ball wins the start opening 2101 and 2102. Even so, by making the voice mode the same as the voice mode executed during the specific production mode, it is possible to notice that a chance has come to the gaming machine that the player is playing. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be noted.

  Further, the same effect can be obtained when the light emission mode of the lamp / LED is set to the same light emission mode as that executed during the specific effect mode. In other words, because the transition control to the high probability state is controlled and the mode is changed to the probability changing mode, the light emission of the gaming machine that has acquired a lot of prize balls by controlling the light emission of the lamp / LED in a manner different from other game machines. If you know the mode of light emission of the lamps and LEDs that are executed in an advantageous state by looking at the mode, you want to be in that state as a player's psychology. In this state, when a gaming machine that is suddenly playing is controlled to emit light in the same manner as the lighting mode that is executed during a specific production mode, it is expected that the gaming machine that you are playing will have a chance. To do. For example, during an effect mode other than the specific effect mode, the lamps / LEDs provided mainly on the game board 4 are controlled to emit light, and during the specific effect mode, the lamps / LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are controlled. Light emission is controlled over a wide range with the lamps and LEDs provided, the brightness of the lamps and LEDs is increased during a specific production mode than during a production mode other than the specific production mode, or during a specific production mode Lamps / LEDs blink at shorter intervals than during a production mode other than a specific production mode, or during a specific production mode, a flashing luminescent color (for example, a specific production mode) The player may have noticed that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has not been viewed, for example, by using a red light emission color and a blue or green light emission color in other production modes. It is Rukoto can be again attracted attention to the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it can appeal that has been controlled to a specific production mode to turn a third party.

  Further, the same effect can be obtained when the movable mode of the movable body is the same as the movable mode executed during the specific effect mode. That is, the movable mode of the gaming machine in which the movable body is controlled to move in a manner different from other gaming machines by shifting to the high probability state and controlled in the probability changing mode, and thereby acquiring a large amount of prize balls If you know the movable mode of the movable body that is executed in an advantageous state, you will have the desire to be in the same state and suddenly the gaming machine you are playing will be executed during a specific production mode When the movable body is controlled to move in a movable manner similar to the movable manner described above, it is expected that a chance has come to the gaming machine that the player is playing. For example, a movable body that is provided in the game area 1100 and that is not movable during a rendering mode other than the specific rendering mode is operated at a predetermined interval, or a movable body that is not movable during the rendering mode other than the specific rendering mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is viewed by causing it to appear forward so as to overlap with the device 1900 or by operating the movable body at a shorter interval during the specific effect mode than during the effect modes other than the specific effect mode. The player who has not been able to notice that something is happening can be made to pay attention to the display content of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the third party is also controlled to a specific production mode. I can appeal that.

  Further, unlike the display content of the flat liquid crystal display device 1900, it is suggested by the sound mode, the operation mode of the movable body, and the light emission mode, so that the control mode of these effect means in other game machines can be easily visually confirmed. Can grasp the control mode of the production means by visually recognizing the control state of other gaming machines in the specific production mode, and suddenly the production means is in the specific production mode in a state other than the specific production mode When it is controlled in the same manner as the control mode, it can be expected that it will be controlled to a specific production mode, and the game entertainment will be improved.

  In this way, by controlling the production means that makes it easy for a third party to recognize the drive state to a mode similar to the mode executed during the specific production mode, the special production mode is entered when a big hit is achieved. In order to suggest that the rate of transition is high (or to transition to a specific performance mode), it is possible to receive a look of envy by executing the performance and give the player a sense of superiority.

  Also, it is said that such an effect is desired to be executed on one's own gaming machine by visually recognizing that the effect means is controlled in the same manner as that executed in a specific effect mode in another game machine. Along with giving a strong desire, you can give yourself a desire to immerse yourself in a sense of superiority.

  In addition, the above-mentioned performance is further improved by suggesting that after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to a more advantageous state (a state in which the expected value of winning a prize ball is high) among a plurality of types of gaming states. It is also possible to plan. For example, when controlling to the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit gaming state (the number of rounds in which the winning ball can be obtained is larger) Control to a large jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the total number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state is larger, such as 15R jackpot gaming state when controlling to 5R jackpot gaming state and 15R jackpot gaming state). When a big hit is made, the same mode as the probability change mode is executed during the fluctuation display (the big hit with a large number of winning balls is higher than the small winning jack with a small number of winning balls in the big hit gaming state) (It may be executed at a rate), and after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the number of times is cut off (when a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, the control in the high probability state is finished) The so-called ST machine, when controlling to the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state), a big hit (for example, 50 times in the probability changing mode) that can display more fluctuations in the probability changing mode (high probability time-short state). When one of the 100 fluctuation displays can be executed, the same mode as that during the probability change mode is executed during the change display when the 100 fluctuation display can be executed (in the probability change mode). A big hit with a large number of variable displays that can be executed may be executed at a higher rate than a big hit with a small number of variable displays that can be executed).

  Specifically, if the 15R (right) probability variation is determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process or the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the first variation pattern setting process and In the second variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern table is selected by selecting the variation pattern table at the time of 15R (right) probability variation big hit, and “melody reach” is determined in the variation pattern table at the time of 15R (right) probability variation big hit. It is selected when the ratio is determined for another probability variable big hit that is controlled to a big hit gaming state in which the number of winning balls that can be acquired is less than the big hit gaming state executed when the 15R (right) probability variable big hit is reached. Set higher than the fluctuation pattern table (the fluctuation pattern table to be selected when other probable big hits are determined is set to “melody reach”. May also be) as configured not be. 15R (Right) In the jackpot gaming state executed when the odd hit is a big hit, the player can acquire a larger amount of prize balls than in the jackpot gaming state executed when the other big hit is hit. The game entertainment can be improved by executing “reach”.

  Similarly, in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the probability variation big hit that can be displayed 100 times in the probability variation mode (high probability short-time state). If determined, the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process are configured to select the variation pattern table at ST100 times big hit and determine the variation pattern. The ratio to be determined as “melody reach” is higher than the variation pattern table selected when the probability variation is determined to be able to display the variation display less than 100 times in the probability variation mode (high probability short-time state). Set (determined to be a probable big hit that can display fluctuation display less than 100 times in the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) It may also be) as configured not determined variation pattern table is selected in the "melody reach" when it is. In the probability variation big hit (probable short time state) in the probability variation mode, the probability variation big hit that can be executed 100 times of variation display is more likely than the probability variation big hit (for example, 50 times) that can execute the variation display less than 100 times. Since it is highly likely to be performed and is more advantageous to the player, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing “Melody Reach”.

  In addition, when control is performed in the probability changing middle mode (high-probability short-time state) and a variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (for example, 50 times), the transition control from the high-probability state to the low-probability state is performed. At this time, the control in the short-time state may be terminated at the same time, and the transition control to the low-probability non-short-time state may be performed. It is also possible to continue to control the transition to the low probability short-time state (until the display of 100 fluctuations is executed later) or until the big hit gaming state is reached again. In this case, the first ST jackpot that controls the shift to the low-probability non-short-time state by simultaneously ending the control of the short-time state when the predetermined number of times of the variable display is executed as the probability-changing mode of frequency cut in this case is determined in advance. If it is configured to control either the second ST jackpot that controls the transition to the low-probability short-time state without ending the control of the short-time state when the variable display is executed for a certain number of times, the first special If the second ST jackpot is determined in step S123 of the symbol stop symbol setting process or the corresponding process of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the first ST fluctuation pattern setting process and the second fluctuation pattern setting process change in the second ST jackpot time A variation table is determined by selecting a pattern table, and “melody reach” is determined in the second ST jackpot variation pattern table. The ratio is set to be higher than the variation pattern table selected when other jackpots including the first ST jackpot are determined (the variation pattern table selected when other jackpots including the first ST jackpot are determined). May be configured not to be determined as “melody reach”). In the second ST jackpot, since the variable display of the predetermined number of times is finished and the transition control from the high probability state to the low probability state is continued, the control in the short time state is continued without being finished. As the number of winnings in 2101 and 2102 increases, the chances of winning a lottery increase, and the player is in a more advantageous state. Therefore, the “melody reach” is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, in the above-described example, during the variable display, driving control is performed for the rendering means (for example, at least one of the means for performing the rendering such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp / LED, etc.) in the same manner as in the specific rendering mode. In the case of a big win in the variable display, at least one of the means for executing the effect such as a speaker, a movable body, a lamp / LED, etc. by controlling to a specific effect mode after the end of the big hit gaming state. ) The drive control in the mode in the specific production mode is shown, but when “Melody Reach” is executed and the big hit is made, the big hit and the big hit gaming state are executed A state similar to the state during the specific effect mode is performed before the transition to the specific mode is performed before the big hit symbol is derived and displayed while the effect that is difficult to be realized by the player is executed. In the representation section may be controlled drive. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215.

  Peripheral control MPU4140a receives the fluctuation pattern of the melody reach 2R probability variation big hit which performs the transition control to the high probability short-time state after executing the “melody reach” and controlling to the 2R big hit gaming state of short time release (about 0.5 seconds) Then, the display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is started, and the output of the voice mode similar to the special voice mode is started from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. (FIG. 214 (A)). At a predetermined timing during the variation display of the right decorative symbol (in the example shown in FIG. 214B, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol reaches a reach that has not yet been stopped). Suddenly, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears) (FIG. 214C).

  Then, after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), the white display is gradually performed from the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off to display white). (FIGS. 214 (D) and (E)), and based on the fact that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is completely whitened out, a “probably changing mode is entered!” Is displayed, so that the changing probability mode (high probability short-time state) ) Is notified to the player (FIG. 214 (F)), and control in the probability changing mode (high probability short-time state) is started (FIG. 214 (G)).

  Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 215, the grand prize opening is opened for a short time twice during the period from when the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out to when it is gradually whitened out and the message “probably entering the mode during probability change!” Is displayed. 2R jackpot gaming state is executed. That is, a predetermined effect (in this example, an effect of gradually whitening out the liquid crystal display device 1900 after blacking out) is executed without displaying the display result of the decorative symbol and without notifying that the big win has occurred. However, by executing the 2R jackpot gaming state during the performance, it is difficult for the player to realize that the 2R jackpot gaming state has been reached. Then, the display result of the decorative symbol is not derived and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed as “probable change mode entry!”, So that the player can be surprised.

  In addition, the voice mode may be the same as the special voice mode (for example, a part of the special voice mode (for example, the first half or No. 1) before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, or is completely the same as the special voice mode. May be output), and then the output of the special voice mode is continued (repeatedly executed) until the control in the probability changing mode ends. Therefore, the special sound mode is output during the fluctuation display, so that the player is reminded of the probability changing mode and can be recognized that it has been controlled to the probability changing mode for some time. be able to.

  In the above example, as shown in FIG. 215, the output of the special voice mode is started when the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern of the melody reach 2R probability variation big hit is started, but during the fluctuation display, that is, the special symbol What is necessary is just to start the output of a special audio | voice form within the period after starting the display of a fluctuation | variation to deriving and displaying the display result of a special symbol.

  Further, it may be executed in combination with the execution of the “melody reach” for outputting the special sound mode during the variable display to stop the display of the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the mode is suddenly shifted to the probability changing mode or whether the big hit gaming state occurs, and the variation in performance increases, so that the player is not bored.

  In the above example, the high probability non-short-time state is always controlled to the probability variation latency mode, but the high probability non-short-time state is controlled to either the probability variation latency mode or the probability variation non-short-time mode. When the probability variation latency mode is controlled in the high probability non-short-time state, the production means (for example, the speaker, the movable body, the lamp / LED, etc.) are continued in the same manner as the probability variation non-time-short mode from the time when the fluctuation is displayed. At least one of the executing means may be drive-controlled to shift control (promotion) from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-short-time mode.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the variation pattern of the promoted melody reach in the probability variation latent mode during the high probability non-short-time state and receives the variation pattern of the promoted melody reach, the left, middle, and right decorations are received. The display of the variation of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is started by starting the display of the variation of the symbols and starting the output of the same speech mode as the specific speech mode output from the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is suddenly blacked out at a predetermined timing (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears).

  Then, after blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), the white display is gradually performed from the vicinity of the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off to display white). Based on the fact that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is completely white-out, the transition control (promotion) is made to the probability variation non-time-short mode (high probability non-time-short state) by displaying “Probability non-time-short mode entry!”. This is notified to the player, and control of the probability variation non-short-time mode is started.

  In this way, when the high probability non-short-time state is controlled and the production mode is controlled to the probability variation latent mode, the same voice mode as the specific voice mode during the variable display (for example, one of the specific voice modes) Part (for example, the first half or number 1 may be completely the same as the specific voice mode), and then the specific voice mode is controlled until the control of the probabilistic non-short-time mode ends. Continue output (repeated execution). Therefore, it is possible to remind the player that the certain variation non-short-time mode has been controlled by the output of the specific voice mode during the fluctuation display, and to recognize that it has been controlled to the certain variation non-short-time mode for some time. Can be improved.

  In the above-described example, the change display in which the specific voice mode is output is not displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is notified to shift to the certain change non-short-time mode after blacking out without displaying the symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal variation display may be executed without blacking out the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the transition to the certain variation non-short-time mode may be notified after deviating and displaying the symbols. Thus, even if the display result is out of place, the game entertainment can be improved by promoting the player from the probability variation latent mode to the probability variation non-short-time mode to a state advantageous to the player. Further, in this case, a predetermined combination (for example, a combination of symbols including all of “1”, “3”, and “5”) may be displayed.

  In addition, even when the transition control (promotion) is not performed from the probability variation latency mode to the probability variation non-short-time mode, the specific voice mode may be output during the variation display at a predetermined rate (so-called gas). In this case, the output period of the specific voice mode during the variation display may be shorter when the probability variation latent mode is continued than when the transition control (promotion) is performed to the probability variation non-short mode. For example, when the transition control to the probability variation non-short-time mode is performed, the output of the specific voice mode is started at a predetermined timing after the start of the variation display (may be simultaneously with the start of the variation display), and then the probability variation non While the specific voice mode is continuously output until the time reduction mode is ended, when the probability variation latent mode is continued without performing the transition control to the probability variation non-time reduction mode, a predetermined timing (after the start of the variable display) The output of the specific voice mode may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display), and the output of the specific voice mode is stopped before the symbols are stopped and displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not blacked out. The symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, even when the transition control (promotion) is not performed to the probability variation non-time reduction mode, the expectation for the probability variation non-time reduction mode can be improved.

[8. Arm accessory production]
Next, an arm accessory effect executed during variable display will be described. In this example, when the arm unit 3250 is displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 during the variable display, the display shifts to a reach effect (reach development effect) with a high expectation level for jackpots. This will be described in detail below.

  As described above, the rear rear movable production unit 3200 is arranged directly behind the front rear movable production unit 3400, and the upper front decoration body 3406 of the front rear movable production unit 3400 and the upper arm of the rear rear movable production unit 3200. Since the unit 3300 (upper arm decorative body 3304) and the forearm unit 3350 (forearm decorative body 3352) are formed in substantially the same size, the back upper front movable effect unit 3400 and the rear upper rear movable effect unit 3200 are normal. In the state (the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the upper arm decorative body 3304 are in the retracted position and the forearm decorative body 3352 is in the retracted position), the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are located behind the back upper front decorative body 3406. The state is almost hidden (see FIG. 174).

  In the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process) executed by the main control MPU 4100a, an arm accessory reach variation pattern that causes the arm unit 3250 to be displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is selected. The peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command instructing the fluctuation pattern. After the predetermined period, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the decorative symbol reach (in this case, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped with the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol is still displayed. In the state where the display is not stopped), a character in a manner of swinging the arm is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 without executing the reach effect. Standing position rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the storage position of FIG. 174 (a) by passing the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden on the side (FIG. 174 (c)). Further, a display in which the upper front decorative body 3406 is focused on the liquid crystal display device 1900 in synchronization with the passage of the upper front decorative body 3406 in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in this example, light is emitted from the upper front decorative body 3406). Display). In this way, the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decoration body 3406, and the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved across from the storage position to the standby position. The fore decoration body 3406, the upper arm decoration body 3304, and the forearm decoration body 3352 can be noticed by the player.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 from the storage position to the standby position based on the received variation pattern, and immediately thereafter, the entire forearm ornament 3352 plays a game. A forearm decoration body at a predetermined timing in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, which is in a state of an appearance position visible from the person's side (see FIG. 175 (e)) or held in a standby position for a predetermined period. The entire appearance of 3352 is set to the appearance position visible from the player side.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a passes the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a state where the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406, and then temporarily stands by (see FIG. 174 (c)), immediately, only the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated clockwise in front view, so that the base end side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 is directed leftward from the back upper front decoration body 3406. The forearm decorative body 3352 and the upper arm decorative body 3304 are rotated so that the tip side moves away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 from the rear side of the back upper front decorative body 3406. Part of the forearm decorative body 3352 as a whole by moving the arm unit 3250 leftward in a front view (see FIG. 175 (d)). A state of occurrence position visible from the player's side (see Fig. 175 (e)). In addition, a display that causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to pay attention to the forearm decoration body 3352 in synchronization with the forward movement of the forearm decoration body 3352 (a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decoration body 3352 in this example). Execute. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 clockwise in front view and rotates the back upper fore decoration body 3406 in the clockwise direction in front view to rotate the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352. The back front decorative body 340 is returned to the accommodation position, and the reach development effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The reach development effect is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development effect, so that the forearm decoration 3352 as a whole moves to the appearance position and becomes visible, thereby improving the player's expectation for the game condition. Can do.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 to be hidden behind the back upper front decoration body 3406 when the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is not in the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side. After passing the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the state and temporarily moving to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)), the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are held at the standby position and a normal reach effect is executed. To do.

  In this standby position, a part of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are exposed to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and can be visually recognized by the player, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the forearm decoration board 3353 and the upper arm decoration body. The upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right in small increments while controlling a plurality of LEDs mounted on the substrate 3305 in a predetermined light emission mode (in this example, blinking red), and the upper arm decoration body 3304 is rotated. In addition, a flame is displayed in the vicinity of the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on which a part of the forearm decoration 3352 overlaps, and the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are highlighted (playing effect). In this way, the expectation for the expression of the upper arm decoration 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 of the player at the standby position is further improved.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates only the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 clockwise in front view at the timing of ending the normal reach effect in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper arm decoration body 3304 The base end side is moved away from the back upper front decorative body 3406 in the left direction, and the front arm decorative body 3352 is rotated so that the front end side is moved away from the upper arm decorative body 3304 from the state where it overlaps with the upper arm decorative body 3304. The upper arm decoration body 3304 and a part of the forearm decoration body 3352 appear from the rear side (see FIG. 175 (d)), and the arm unit 3250 is further moved leftward in a front view, so that the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is moved. Is in a state of appearance that can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e)). In addition, a display that causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 to pay attention to the forearm decoration body 3352 in synchronization with the forward movement of the forearm decoration body 3352 (a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decoration body 3352 in this example). Execute.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a rotates the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 clockwise in front view and rotates the back upper fore decorative body 3406 in the clockwise direction in front view to rotate the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352. The back front decorative body 340 is returned to the accommodation position, and the reach development effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the reach development effect, the expectation level for the big hit is higher than the normal reach effect that has been executed. Therefore, the player's expectation for the big hit game state is achieved by moving the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position and making it visible. Can be improved.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the reach of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern, and immediately waits for the back upper front ornament 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 without executing the reach effect. Without moving to the position (FIG. 174 (c)), it may be a normal reach effect (a reach effect in the same effect mode or a reach effect in a different effect mode). One special design, second special design that performs reach production multiple times (one that develops reach production multiple times, one that develops reach production multiple times, one that performs pseudo-continuous variation and multiple reach effects) Or a reach effect over a plurality of fluctuating displays)) after a predetermined number of times (may be once or multiple times). Upper front decorative body 3406, there is a case of moving the upper arm decorative body 3304, and a forearm ornamental body 3352 to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)).

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a also uses the received variation pattern to move the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the standby position after executing a normal reach effect a predetermined number of times. After the upper fore ornament 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 are moved to the standby position, the entire forearm ornament 3352 is immediately moved to the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (FIG. 175 (e)). Or the entire position of the forearm decoration 3352 can be seen from the player side at a predetermined timing in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 to the standby position after executing the normal reach effect a predetermined number of times, and immediately thereafter, moves the forearm decorative body. The entire appearance of 3352 is set to the appearance position where it can be seen from the player side (see FIG. 175 (e)), and the forearm decoration is added to the liquid crystal display 1900 in synchronization with the forward movement of the forearm decoration 3352 in the liquid crystal display 1900. A display that causes attention to 3352 (in this example, a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decoration 3352) is executed. Thereafter, the peripheral control MPU 4140a returns the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 340 to the accommodated positions, and starts the reach development effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The reach development effect is higher than the normal reach effect in the reach development effect, so that the forearm decoration 3352 as a whole moves to the appearance position and becomes visible, thereby improving the player's expectation for the game condition. Can do.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 to the standby position after executing the normal reach effect a predetermined number of times, and immediately thereafter, the entire forearm ornament 3352 When the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 are temporarily moved to the standby position (FIG. 174 (c)) when the appearance position is not visible from the player side, the upper arm ornament is moved. 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 are held at the standby position for a predetermined period, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 again performs a normal reach effect (a reach effect with a higher hit expectation level than the reach effect previously performed). Or you may execute a reach effect with a big hit expectation degree equivalent to the reach effect that was executed last time) That. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the above-mentioned accessory effect production to further improve the expectation for the expression of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a moves to the appearance position where the entire forearm decoration 3352 can be seen from the player side at the timing of ending the normal reach effect in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 175 (e)). ) And a display for causing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to pay attention to the forearm decorative body 3352 in synchronization with the forward movement of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (in this example, a display in which light is emitted from the forearm decorative body 3352) ).

  In this way, the back upper front decorative body 3406 that is hardly visible (difficult to see) from the player side, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406. The game that the upper arm decoration 3304 is supposed to be displayed in order to move to the standby position where it is hardly visible from the player side (difficult to see) and waits even though it is once visible to the player in a state. Make the person beat and discourage. Thereafter, by displaying the upper arm decoration 3304, the player can be surprised and more delighted, and the gaming interest is improved.

  Note that if the peripheral control MPU 4140a is determined not to move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position by the main control MPU 4100a not selecting the arm accessory reach variation pattern (in other words, the entire forearm decoration 3352 is set to the appearance position). Even if it is not determined to be moved), the back-upper front movable effect unit 3400 and the back-upper rear movable effect unit 3200 are moved at a predetermined rate. Specifically, even if the arm accessory reach variation pattern is not selected in the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4140a, When a variation pattern is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs variation display based on the reception of the variation pattern command instructing the variation pattern, displays the reach of the decorative symbol, and then executes the reach effect. Immediately or after a normal reach effect has been executed a predetermined number of times, the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 are moved from the storage position to the standby position.

  However, in this case, after the peripheral control MPU 4140a derives and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the timing of ending the normal reach effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 without moving the entire forearm ornament 3352 to the appearance position. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in front view with the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406. The upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 340 are returned to the accommodated position without moving the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to be visible. In addition, when the symbol which is not a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out for a predetermined period (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears). The lamps / LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned off, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in front view and moved to the accommodation position. To do. Accordingly, the rotating upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are made inconspicuous. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is white-out for a predetermined period (in this case, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is lit with the maximum brightness of white). ) And a lamp / LED arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated in the clockwise direction when housed. Move to position. Accordingly, the rotating upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are made inconspicuous.

  Thus, even when the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is not visible, the upper arm decorative body 3304 and the forearm decorative body 3352 are hidden behind the back upper front decorative body 3406 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be viewed. Crossing the front and moving the player from the storage position to the standby position to attract the player's attention, and performing the reach effect while conscious of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 held at the standby position to perform upper arm decoration The expectation for the expression of the body 3304 and the forearm decoration 3352 can be improved.

  In addition, since the plurality of timings for moving the back upper forebody 3406, the upper arm ornament 3304, and the forearm ornament 3352 to the standby position and the timing for moving the forearm ornament 3352 to the appearance position are set, the variation display is terminated. Until then, the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and the forearm decorative body 3352 can be expected to move to the standby position, and the back upper front decorative body 3406, the upper arm decorative body 3304, and Expectation can be given to the movement of the forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position until the change display is finished in a state where the forearm decoration 3352 is moving to the standby position. Further, the longer the period from the start of the variable display until the forearm decorative body 3352 moves to the appearance position (the lower the timing at which the forearm decorative body 3352 moves to the appearance position), the higher the big hit expectation degree. In this case, it is possible to improve the expectation for the big hit by executing the reach development effect when the forearm decoration 3352 moves to the appearance position at an early stage after starting the variable display. Even if the forearm decoration 3352 does not move to the appearance position at an early stage, if the forearm decoration 3352 is moved to the appearance position after that, the big hit expectation is further increased, and the player is discouraged. Without expectation for the movement to the appearance position of the forearm decorative body 3352 thereafter, the expectation for the big hit can be improved.

  In addition, the arm accessory reach variation pattern may be determined only when it is a win in the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4100a. However, the arm accessory reach fluctuation pattern may be determined at a predetermined rate lower than that in the case of winning. Also, the arm accessory gusset reach variation pattern may be determined only when the variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing) executed by the main control MPU 4100a is out of place. Also in the case of winning, the arm accessory gusset reach variation pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio lower than that in the case of winning. As a result, when the entire forearm decorative body 3352 moves to the appearance position and becomes visible, the ratio of jackpot, that is, the jackpot expectation is increased.

  It may be determined by lottery whether or not the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right at the standby position. In this case, The upper arm ornament 3304 and the forearm ornament 3352 are moved to the left and right at the standby position at a higher rate than when the arm accessory reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gasase variation variation pattern are received when receiving the arm accessory gas variation variation pattern. By determining that the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right at the standby position, the big hit expectation degree may be increased, or the forearm decoration body 3352 may be increased. A variation pattern command is received that indicates an arm accessory reach variation pattern that moves the whole to the appearance position and makes it visible. In this case, the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are chopped to the left and right at the standby position at a higher rate than when the variation pattern command for indicating the arm accessory variation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration body 3352 to the appearance position is received. When the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 are rotated to the left and right in the left and right directions at the standby position, the degree of expectation that the entire forearm decoration body 3352 moves to the appearance position, in other words, reach development is determined. The execution expectation level of the production becomes high, and consequently, the big hit expectation level increases.

  Further, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 may be made different according to the big hit expectation. For example, whether or not to control the light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 and / or the light emission mode is determined by lottery, and the arm combination reach variation pattern and the arm combination gusset reach variation that become a big hit When a pattern is received, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are controlled to emit light at a higher rate than when the arm accessory reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gusset reach variation pattern that are shifted are received. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are controlled to emit light, the big hit expectation degree may be increased, or the arm accessory reach fluctuation pattern that is a big hit And an arm accessory reach fluctuation pattern that is out of sync when the arm accessory gasse reach fluctuation pattern is received. When the arm combination reach variation pattern and the arm combination release variation pattern are received at a higher rate than when the arm combination release variation pattern is received. Forearm decorative board 3353 and upper arm in a specific light emission mode by determining the normal light emission mode (blinking in blue) at a higher rate than when receiving the arm accessory reach variation pattern and the arm accessory gascer variation variation pattern that are jackpots When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 3305 are controlled to emit light, the big hit expectation may be increased.

  Further, the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are made different according to the degree of expectation for moving the entire forearm decoration body 3352 to the appearance position, in other words, the execution expectation degree of reach development effect. You may do it. For example, whether or not to control light emission of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decoration board 3353 and the upper arm decoration board 3305 and / or the light emission mode is determined by lottery, and the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is moved to the appearance position and can be visually recognized. When the arm accessory reach variation pattern to be in the state is received, the forearm decoration board 3353 and the upper arm decoration board 3305 are more likely to be received at a higher rate than when the arm accessory gasse reach variation pattern that does not move the entire forearm decoration 3352 to the appearance position is received. Expected to move the entire forearm decorative body 3352 to the appearance position when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decorative board 3353 and the upper arm decorative board 3305 are controlled to emit light by deciding to control the light emission of the plurality of mounted LEDs. The forearm decoration body 3352 may be moved to the appearance position so that it can be visually recognized. When the arm accessory reach variation pattern is received, the entire forearm decoration 3352 is not moved to the appearance position, and the specific light emission mode (flashing red) is determined at a higher rate than when the arm accessory gas variation variation pattern is received. When receiving an arm accessory reach variation pattern that moves the entire forearm ornament 3352 to the appearance position and makes it visible when the entire arm combination 3352 does not move to the appearance position. The forearm decoration body when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the forearm decoration board 3353 and the upper arm decoration board 3305 are controlled to emit light in a specific light emission mode by determining a normal light emission mode (blue blinking) at a higher rate. The degree of expectation for moving the entire 3352 to the appearance position may be increased.

  Further, in the above example, the symbol is stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol at the timing of ending the normal reach effect executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 without moving the entire forearm ornament 3352 from the standby position to the appearance position. When displayed, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out (after the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off) (after the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is confirmed and displayed). And the lamps / LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned off, while the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise in front view. It is configured to rotate and move to the accommodation position, but before the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is confirmed and displayed (normal The arm design 3304 and the forearm decoration may be displayed after the off symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative design at the timing of ending the torch effect, or before the off symbol is stopped and displayed. 3352 and the front upper decorative body 3406 may be configured to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front and move to the accommodation position. In this case, the display period of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out. Only the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the forearm decoration body 3352 rotate in the clockwise direction in the front view without rotating all of the upper arm decoration body 3304, the forearm decoration body 3352, and the back upper fore decoration body 3406 in the clockwise direction in the front view. When the entire forearm decorative body 3352 is moved to the appearance position, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on and disposed near the liquid crystal display device 1900. After lighting the lamp · LED, production which becomes a big hit may be executed (so-called revival director) and reach the development director and the like. As a result, even after the player recognizes that the variable display has ended, a big hit can be given, which can give unexpectedness and surprise, and in the variable display executed after that, the expectation for the big hit is also given after the end of the variable display. Can improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the normal reach effect being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is finished without moving the entire forearm decoration 3352 from the standby position to the appearance position, the liquid crystal display device 1900 over a predetermined period. Is blacked out (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears), and the lamps and LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned off. Although the body 3352 and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are configured to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front and move to the storage position, the upper arm decorative body 3304 that moves from the standby position to the storage position, the forearm decorative body 3352, and The above-described example is not limited as long as it makes the back front decorative body 3406 inconspicuous (makes it difficult for the player to see).For example, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is white-out for a predetermined period (in this case, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the maximum brightness of white) and the lamp disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 The LED may be turned on, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 may be rotated clockwise when viewed from the front and moved to the accommodation position.

  Further, even when the entire forearm decoration 3352 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the upper arm decoration 3304, the forearm decoration 3352, and the back upper front decoration 3406 that move from the appearance position to the storage position are made inconspicuous ( It is also possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. For example, after the entire forearm decoration 3352 is moved from the standby position to the appearance position, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blacked out for a predetermined period (the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned off and the display disappears). At the same time, the lamps / LEDs arranged in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are turned off, and the upper arm decorative body 3304, the forearm decorative body 3352, and the back upper front decorative body 3406 are rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 may be white-out for a predetermined period (in this case, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the maximum brightness of white) and the liquid crystal display device A lamp / LED arranged in the vicinity of 1900 is turned on, and the upper arm decoration body 3304, the forearm decoration body 3352, and the back The ornamental body 3406 may be moved to the stowed position by rotating the front view clockwise.

  In the above example, the reach development is executed based on the movement of the entire forearm decoration body 3352 to the appearance position, but at least the forearm decoration than before the entire forearm decoration body 3352 is moved to the appearance position. The present invention is not limited to the above as long as the effect display with a high degree of big hit expectation is executed after the entire body 3352 is moved to the appearance position.

[9. Projector production]
Next, projector effects executed during variable display will be described. In this example, by executing the 15R big hit gaming state using the second opening / closing member 2553 as the big hit gaming state, the number of winning balls is the largest among the multiple types of big hit gaming states, and for the player after the big hit gaming state ends By controlling to the most advantageous high-speed short-time state, the most advantageous state for the player is given. When the 15R (right) probability variable big hit is won, the projector unit 2150 is made to emit light from the variable display until the big hit gaming state ends. A predetermined image is projected on the player. This will be described in detail below.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a starts a variation display based on receiving a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern indicating a 15R (right) probability variation big hit, derives and displays a big hit symbol, and then displays a character. The character undresses and performs an effect that shows the cherry blossoms depicted on the character's shoulder. Further, the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light in synchronization with the action of taking off the clothes of the character, and the same image as the cherry blossom snow drawn on the shoulder of the character is projected on both shoulders of the player.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a big hit start command instructing the start of the big hit gaming state from the main control MPU 4100a, the projector unit 2150 continuously emits light and projects an image similar to cherry blossom snow on both shoulders of the player. The effect during the big hit gaming state is executed. The projector unit 2150 is turned off based on the reception of the jackpot end command for instructing the end of the jackpot gaming state from the main control MPU 4100a.

  In this way, when a big hit that is the most advantageous for the player (in this example, 15R (right) probable big hit), the same image as the cherry blossom snow is projected on both shoulders of the player during the fluctuation display, and during the big hit gaming state Because it continuously projects, it is possible to improve the gaming interest for the players with cherry blossoms projected, and to become the most advantageous big hit against third parties who are not playing with the gaming machine Can appeal and give a sense of superiority. In addition, a third party who is not playing with the game machine can recognize that the cherry blossom snow is projected when it is the most advantageous big hit, and expects the projector unit 2150 to project the cherry blossom snow. You can let them play. In addition, since an image similar to the cherry blossom snow drawn on the shoulder of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is projected on both shoulders of the player, it is possible to give an impression that the player himself has become a character, A player can be entertained by playing as a character. In addition, since the player's body is used to reproduce the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the player himself / herself is questioned about the attention of the third party and the attention of the third party. It becomes possible to notice that it has changed to a state imitating the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and further has changed to a state imitating the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to guess that there is something good and to improve the expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline of the game interest.

  In the above-described example, the projector unit 2150 is made to emit light and an image similar to the cherry blossom snow drawn on the shoulder of the character is projected on both shoulders of the player, but at least a predetermined character is used using the player's body. What is necessary is just to have a means for changing to the imitated state, for example, by blowing ink that can be lost to the player to draw an image similar to that of a predetermined character to change it to an imitated state, or a fan For example, it may be changed to a state in which a predetermined character is imitated by blowing air to a player by blowing the hair or clothes.

  In addition, when the player's body is used to change (project, blow, and blow) the player's body using means for changing to a state imitating a predetermined character, the player's body can act (project, blow, A means for making it possible to change the action position so that air can be blown) may be provided separately. For example, a driving unit that can change the projection position so that the projector unit 2150 can project the image onto an arbitrary place may be provided separately. Thereby, even a player with a different body shape can project a desired image at an appropriate position on the body, and the player can be reliably changed to a state imitating a predetermined character. In addition, a plurality of types of characters may be provided to change the player. In this case, an appropriate position for each character (for example, a character projecting cherry blossoms on the shoulder, a character (for example, “power”) on the forehead). A desired image can be projected on a character to be displayed and a character (for example, a character displaying “Q” or the like) in the center of the chest.

  In addition, when the player's body is used to change to a state imitating a predetermined character, it is not necessarily a big hit, but at a predetermined rate, it will be a big hit other than the big hit that is the most advantageous for the player or the shift. In this case, at least the change display to the state imitated until the end of the change display (before starting the next change display or before starting the big hit gaming state) may be ended. .

  Further, a plurality of types of characters for changing the player may be provided. In this case, the expectation level for jackpots may be varied depending on the changed character. For example, when changing to a state imitating the main character (the main character), the ratio (expectation) that is the most advantageous jackpot for the player is higher than when changing to a state imitating other characters. Thus, when the sub-character (supporting role) is changed to a state imitating the main character and the hostile character, the ratio (expectation) is different from the case of changing to a state imitating other characters. ) May be increased. Moreover, you may make it imitate also the friend (ally) of the main character among sub characters (supporting role), and when it changes to the state which imitated the friend (ally) of the main character, the main character The ratio (expectation) that is the most advantageous jackpot than when imitating is lowered, and the ratio (expectation) that is the most advantageous jackpot is higher than when imitating the main character and the hostile character It may be made to become.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that are thrown into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged below the center bonus 2500. When a predetermined lottery result is selected by the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the lottery result is selected, and a predetermined region including two projection regions TR arranged in the vicinity where the player is seated. The projector unit 2150 corresponding to the projection area TR provided on each of the left and right sides of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 in response to the detection of the object from the object detection means 2530 for detecting the player in the player. Right side decoration unit 200 for illuminating and decorating the outer periphery of the glass plate 594 that partitions the front end of the gaming area 1100 at the same time. Left side framing unit 240, and causes lit off or reduced the emission decoration such as upper framing unit 280. The light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 to the projection area TR is reflected by the projection area TR (part of the player's body) to the game area 1100 and further played by the transparent plate-like glass plate 594. It will be reflected to the person side. At this time, the light emitting decorations of the decoration units 200, 240, and 280 are turned off or reduced, and the light directly irradiated to the player is reduced, so that the game area 1100 is relatively dark. Therefore, the light (image) projected from the projector unit 2150 to the light projection area TR, reflected by the light projection area TR, and further reflected by the glass plate 594 of the door frame 5 to the player side becomes relatively strong. The image (light) reflected by the glass plate 594 from the player side becomes conspicuous. As described above, the image reflected by the glass plate 594 to the player side is an image reflected by the light projection region TR and further reflected by the glass plate 594. Therefore, when viewed from the player side, the light source Instead of seeing (projector unit 2150), the image projected by projection unit 2150 into projection area TR and a part of the player's body in projection area TR illuminated by the projection of the image are reflected on glass plate 594. Will be visible. Accordingly, when the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light according to the gaming state, an image projected on the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and a part of the player's body are reflected. By providing the player with an effect completely different from the effect using the liquid crystal display device 1900 or a movable decorative body, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to produce an unexpectedly high effect. It is possible to suppress the interest of the player from being attracted and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the projector unit 2150 emits light according to the gaming state, a part of the player's body located in the projection region TR is reflected on the glass plate 594 and projected from the projector unit 2150 onto the body part. The player sees what is reflected on the glass plate 594, so that the player thinks "What is it?" And pays attention within the projection area TR (part of his / her body on which the image is projected). Therefore, it becomes possible to notice the irradiation of light from the projector unit 2150, and it can be thought that there is something good by recognizing the light emission of the projector unit 2150, and the expectation for the game is increased. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the image is projected from the projector unit 2150 onto a part of the player's body located in the projection area TR, the image of the image shown to the player is moved by the movement of the player on which the image is projected. Since the range changes or the part where the image is projected is not a flat shape but a three-dimensional shape, when the player moves, the projected image changes and the image can be expanded and contracted, Even a single image can be changed in various ways, and it is possible to entertain the appearance of the image projected on the player, so that it is difficult to get bored and to reduce the interest.

  Furthermore, an image is projected from the projector unit 2150 onto the projection area TR, and a person other than a player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 1 (another player or pachinko machine) by projecting a relatively pinpoint image. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the light emission of the projector unit 2150 for the employees of the game hall where 1 is installed. That is, only the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can notice the effect using the projector unit 2150, and the effect using the projector unit 2150 can be enjoyed without being noticed by other players. Since it is possible, a chance after the presentation by the projector unit 2150 that emits light according to the lottery result lottered by accepting a game ball to the first starting port 2101 or the like (for example, a state where the big prize opening 2103 can be accepted) Even if the game has not arrived (in the case of losing production), other players, etc. are not aware of the production, and the player can pretend to be calm, and even in the case of losing production, It can be enjoyed without hesitation, and it can be suppressed that the interest of the player in the game is reduced.

  In addition, the projection area TR is located below the center in the vertical direction of the game area 1100, and when a player with a normal height sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, it is below the head of the player. Therefore, the light of the image projected from the projector unit 2150 can be prevented from reaching the player's eyes as much as possible, and the player emits light from the projector unit 2150. It can be prevented from feeling dazzling, and it can be suppressed that the dazzling feels uncomfortable and lowers interest.

  Further, since the projector unit 2150 is provided in the attacker unit 2100 disposed below the center of the game area 1100, even if the projector unit 2150 emits light at a position lower than the height of the player's eyes, It is possible to reduce the light from the projector unit 2150 directly reaching the player's eyes as much as possible, and make it difficult for the player to notice. Therefore, the player can notice the light emission effect by the projector unit 2150 by viewing the image projected on the projection area TR, the image reflected on the glass plate 594, and the like, and the impact at the start of the effect can be realized. Since it can be strengthened, the unexpectedness with respect to the light emission effect can be enhanced, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, since the projector unit 2150 that projects an image onto the projection area TR corresponding to the position of the player detected by the object detection means 2530 is caused to emit light, the image (light) from the projector unit 2150 can be reliably transmitted to the specific area. The projector unit 2150 can project an image from the projector unit 2150 corresponding to the optimal position (projection region TR) according to the player's posture. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing by further enhancing the effect.

  Further, since the projector unit 2150 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100, the projector unit 2150 can be made inconspicuous, and the light of the projector unit 2150 can reach the player's eyes directly. In addition, when the projector unit 2150 is caused to emit light, even if the light from the projector unit 2150 is directly visible to the player, the player has the illusion that it is part of the light emitting decoration of the attacker unit 2100. It is possible to prevent the projector unit 2150 from directly recognizing the light emission effect, and to ensure that the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, since the object detecting means 2530 is provided in the center combination 2500 arranged in the approximate center in the game area 1100, it is arranged in front of the glass plate 594 (glass unit 590) including the projection area TR. The player (object) in the predetermined area (detection area) can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably detects the object in the predetermined area and reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained. Further, since the object detection means 2530 is provided in the center accessory 2500, the object detection means 2530 can be attached to a desired position simply by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1200, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to simplify the labor involved in assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, after inserting the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 into the opening 1215 formed in the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, the rear of the game panel 1200 is visible from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Since the liquid crystal display device 1900 is arranged on the side, it is possible to make it fully visible from the player side through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 and the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the effect using the projector unit 2150 is achieved. In addition, it is possible to produce effects using the liquid crystal display device 1900, presenting various effects to the player, making it difficult to get bored, and making the player entertained by various effects, It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, in the normal state, by performing the effect by the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900, it is possible to enhance the premium feeling for the effect by the projector unit 2150, to further increase the impact of the effect by the projector unit 2150, and to play the game It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for the player, and to suppress the player's interest from decreasing.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1200, and the projector unit is more likely to position the player's viewpoint on the rear side of the gaming panel 1200 in the production by the production image of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the player's viewpoint can be positioned on the front side of the game panel 1200 (glass unit 590) in the effect by the light emission of 2150, the player's viewpoint is determined according to the device (projector unit 2150, liquid crystal display device 1900, etc.) used for the effect. The point of view can be changed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from becoming monotonous by preventing the production from becoming monotonous.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the arm unit base 3251 that rotatably supports (axially supports) the base end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper arm unit 3300 is When the 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are in the storage position and the storage position, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are positioned above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and are not visible from the player side. In this state, when the upper arm unit 3300 is rotated from the storage position to the appearance position by the upper arm drive motor 3254 according to the gaming state, the front end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is lowered to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3300 together with the forearm unit 3350. Furthermore, when the forearm unit 3350 is rotated from the retracted position to the deployed position by the forearm drive motor 3307, the front end side of the forearm unit 3350 is rotated away from the upper arm unit 3300. It is possible to show the player such a movable effect that the arm unit 3250 extends in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the forearm unit 3350 is rotated from the retracted position to the deployed position by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the gaming state, the front end side of the forearm unit 3350 is lowered to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and appears. Further, when the upper arm unit 3300 is pivotally moved from the storage position to the appearance position by the upper arm drive motor 3254, the upper arm unit 3300 descends to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to push out the forearm unit 3350. Therefore, it is possible to show the player such a movable effect that the entire upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 greatly change the form (shape) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, the two upper arm units 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 appearing on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the gaming state can show the player a moving effect that has changed in an unprecedented manner. The player can be surprised and the player can think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised and the interest can be suppressed from decreasing.

  Further, since the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be separately rotated by the independent upper arm drive motor 3254 and the forearm drive motor 3307, the form of the entire arm unit 3250 can be changed in various ways. In addition to attracting the attention of the player, by providing the arm unit 3250 capable of various movements, the movement (movable effect) of the arm unit 3250 can be made less tired, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, a forearm unit 3350 that rotates about the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is further provided on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 that rotates about the proximal end side. In other words, since the arm unit 3250 having the two internodes is provided, the entire arm unit 3250 can express the part of the arm of a human being (such as a predetermined character) such as a human being or an animal. Can be realized, and the movement of the arm unit 3250 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are rotated and moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the gaming state, and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is blocked by the arm unit 3250. Therefore, the appearance (rotation) of the arm unit 3250 can be made conspicuous from the player, and it becomes possible to make the player pay attention to the decoration unit, so that the player can enjoy the movable effect by the arm unit 3250. Can be suppressed, and the arm unit 3250 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play.

  In addition, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are arranged above the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper arm unit 3300 is used when the upper arm unit 3300 and the like are driven to appear (movable effect) to be positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. And the like are moved downward so that the load applied to the upper arm driving motor 3254, the forearm driving motor 3307 and the like is reduced by being supported by the gravity acting on the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350. In addition, the arm unit 3250 can be made to appear speedily by increasing the rotation speed, and the impact at the time of appearance can be increased to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, a forearm drive motor 3307 for rotationally driving the forearm unit 3350 is disposed on the proximal end side of the upper arm unit 3300, and rotation from the forearm drive motor 3307 is performed by the transmission rotating body 3311, the link member 3312, and the like. The forearm unit 3350 that is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is transmitted to the upper arm unit 3300, so that the forearm drive motor 3307 having a relatively heavy weight is disposed on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300. A rotational moment applied to (acting on) the dynamic shaft can be reduced as much as possible, and an increase in load on the upper arm drive motor 3254 can be suppressed. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to enlarge the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like in order to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like more durable, it is easy to secure a space for arranging the upper arm unit 3300 relatively, and the upper arm unit 3300 is made possible. The arm unit 3250 that is conspicuous in the pachinko machine 1 can be provided. Further, since it is not necessary to use a component having high strength and rigidity as a component to make the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like more durable, the cost for the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like (pachinko machine 1) increases. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the forearm unit 3350 is provided with a transmission pin 3351b eccentric from the axis of the second shaft portion 3301b, and a transmission rotating body 3311 having a crank pin 3311b revolved by the forearm drive motor 3307, and cranks at both ends. Since a hook-like link member 3312 that supports the pin 3311b and the transmission pin 3351b is provided, the hook-like link is rotated when the transmission rotating body 3311 is rotated by the forearm drive motor 3307 according to the gaming state. The crank pin 311b whose base end side of the member 3312 is pivotally connected revolves, and the transmission pin 3351b is pushed or pulled by the link member 3312 in accordance with the revolving direction of the crank pin 3311b. It will revolve and the forearm unit 3350 can be reliably rotated. .

  Further, the rotation of the transmission rotating body 3311 disposed on the proximal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 is transmitted to the second shaft portion 3301b (the forearm unit 3350) on the distal end side of the upper arm unit 3300 by the hook-shaped link member 3312. Since the elongated link member 3312 is arranged in the upper arm unit 3300, the rotation from the forearm drive motor 3254 is second compared with the case where the rotation is transmitted by a plurality of gears. The weight of the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting to the shaft portion 3301b (second rotation shaft 3351a) can be reduced, and an increase in load on the upper arm drive motor 3254 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the size or strength of the upper frame cigarage motor 3254 and the like, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, in the upper arm unit 3300, the crank pin 3311b of the transmission rotating body 3311 has a link axis connecting the center of the crank pin 3311b and the center of the transmission pin 3351b on one side (upper side) with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotating body 3311. ) And a position where the link axis revolves to the other side (downward) with respect to the rotation center of the transmission rotator 3311, and the crank pin 3311b is connected to the transmission rotator 3311. Since the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position when it is slightly revolved to one side with respect to the center of rotation, the forearm unit 3350 is in the storage position, that is, the crank pin 3311b is slightly to the one side (upper side). In the revolved position state, the rotation moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 causes the club via the link member 3312. The direction of the force acting on the cup pin 3311b acts in a direction to revolve the crank pin 3311b to one side (upward, counterclockwise direction in front view), but the crank pin 3311b (transmission rotating body 3311). Since the revolution range is restricted by the slit 3311c so as not to revolve to one side any more, the crankpin 3311b continues to stop at a position slightly revolved to one side without revolving. Therefore, when the forearm unit 3350 is in the retracted position, even if a rotational moment applied to the forearm unit 3350 acts on the crankpin 3311b via the link member 3312, the crankpin 3311b does not revolve and the transmission rotating body 3311 does not rotate. In other words, since the rotation of the transmission rotating body 3311 can be locked (blocked), the rotational driving force due to the rotational moment acts on the rotation shaft of the forearm drive motor 3307 via the transmission rotating body 3311. Can be avoided. Therefore, in order to maintain the forearm unit 3250 in the retracted position, it is not necessary to continue to drive the forearm drive motor 3307, and the load on the forearm drive motor 3307 is reduced and the forearm drive motor 3307 and the like are damaged early. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to breakage of the forearm drive motor 3307 and the like, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered due to the interruption of the game. .

  Further, as described above, since the forearm unit 3350 can be maintained in the storage position without applying a load to the forearm drive motor 3307, it is necessary to use an expensive one provided with a brake mechanism as the forearm drive motor 3307. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost for the forearm drive motor 3307 (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, the upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 are provided with a plurality of LEDs (upper arm decoration board 3305 and forearm decoration board 3353) that can emit light according to the game state. The upper arm unit 3300 and the forearm unit 3350 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs when the apparatus 1900 is rotated to the front side, so that the player can make the arm unit 3250 stand out from the player. The arm unit 3250 that can attract the player's interest can be obtained, and when the player pays attention to the arm unit 3250, the arm unit 3250 can surely produce a movable effect, a light effect, and the like. It can be entertained and it can prevent the player ’s interest from deteriorating. That.

  In addition, the upper arm unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 and the transmission upper body 3311 and the link member 3312 and the like are attached to the rear side of the upper arm decoration body 3304. An upper arm base 3301 having translucency, and an upper arm decoration board 3305 having a plurality of LEDs attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301, and light from the LEDs is played through the upper arm decoration body 3304. Since the irradiation is performed on the person side, the entire upper arm unit 3300 can be brightly decorated to make it easier to see the shape and decoration of the upper arm decoration body 3304, and the decoration effect of the upper arm unit 3300 can be further enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to make the upper arm unit 3300 stand out and attract the player's attention.

  Further, the upper arm decoration board 3305 having a plurality of LEDs is attached to the rear side of the upper arm base 3301 that supports the upper arm decoration body 3304 from the rear side, and the upper arm decoration board 3305 (LED) is attached to the upper arm decoration body 3304. Since it is in a state as far away as possible, the upper arm decoration body 3304 can be irradiated with light irradiated from the LED toward the back side of the upper arm decoration body 3304 as much as possible. 3304 can be illuminated and decorated uniformly without spots. That is, the upper arm unit 3300 can be beautifully decorated with light emission, so that the appearance of the upper arm unit 3300 can be improved, the decoration effect of the upper arm unit 3300 can be enhanced, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the link member 3312 and the like disposed on the front side of the upper arm decorative board 3305 have a light transmitting property, light from the upper arm decorative board 3305 (LED) is transmitted through the part having the light transmitting property to the upper arm. The decorative body 3304 can be irradiated well, and the upper arm decorative body 3304 can be illuminated and decorated neatly.

  In addition, the game area 1100 includes a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 that displays an effect image that can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with an atmosphere similar to that of the machine, and it is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to a player accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and this pachinko machine as a pachinko machine to play. The machine 1 can be easily selected.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 100 Door frame base unit 200 Right side decoration unit (outer decoration unit)
204 Side upper decorative member (decorative member)
214 Upper right side decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
214a LED
214b LED
214c LED
216 Right side lower decoration board (decoration board)
216a LED
216b LED
240 Left side decoration unit (outside decoration unit)
244 Side upper decorative member (decorative member)
254 Left side upper decorative board (decorative board)
254a LED
254b LED
256 Left side lower decoration board (decoration board)
256a LED
256b LED
280 Upper decoration unit (outer decoration unit)
281 Front decoration member (decoration member)
286 Upper decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
286a LED
286b LED
288 Bottom decorative member (decorative member)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1100 Game area 1110 Front component member 1200 Game panel 1210 Panel board 1215 Opening part 1220 Panel holder 1900 Liquid crystal display device 1901a-1901d 1st reservation display area 1902a-1902d 2nd reservation display area 2000 Table unit 2100 Attacker unit (acceptance unit)
2101 First start port (receiving port)
2102 2nd starting port (receiving port, variable receiving port)
2103 Grand prize opening (reception entrance, variable entrance)
2104 General prize winning entrance
2105 Movable piece 2106 Opening / closing member 2121 Start-up solenoid 2124 Attacker solenoid 2150 Projector unit (projection device)
2150R Right projector unit 2150L Left projector unit 2152 Projector body 2156 Light source unit 2157 Lens group 2158 Image film 2500 Center object 2501 Window unit 2502 Flange unit 2503 Peripheral wall unit 2504 Warp inlet 2505 Warp outlet 2510 Stage 2514 Chance inlet 2515 Chance outlet 2530 Object detection Means 2531 Upper object sensor 2532 Left object sensor 2533 Right object sensor 2534 Lower object sensor 2550 Second attacker unit 2552 Second big prize opening TR Projection area (specific area)

Claims (1)

After the start condition is established, a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of symbol information based on the establishment of the start condition and derives and displays a display result;
A winning determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied when the start condition is satisfied;
Display control means for controlling display of the variable display device based on the determination result of the corresponding drop determination means,
A gaming machine that controls to a profit granting state in which a profit is given to a player after the display control means derives and displays a specific display result on the variable display device when the winning determination means determines that the winning condition is satisfied In
A movable member movable in a predetermined movable manner;
After the start of the variable display, the movable member is moved in a predetermined specific movable manner in spite of being displayed in front of the variable display device visible to the player from a storage position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Preliminary moving means for moving to a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize without passing through the front of the variable display device,
Specific movable means for moving the movable member moved to the standby position by the preliminary movable means to an appearance position in front of the variable display device and moving the movable member in the specific movable manner;
The movable member that has been moved to the standby position by the preliminary movable means and the movable member that has been moved to the appearance position by the specific movable means and moved in the specific movable manner to the storage position for storage. Means,
The movable member is moved to the storage position by the player when the movable member waiting at the standby position is moved to the storage position without being moved to the appearance position by the specific movable means. A game machine comprising: a concealing means at the time of storage that makes it difficult to recognize what is being performed.

Images